Sprint Nextel Cell Phone PG86100 User Manual

User Guide  
www.sprint.com  
©2011 Sprint. SPRINT and the logo are trademarks of Sprint.  
Other marks are the property of their respective owners.  
5/18/11  
Table of Contents  
Tip: Looking for something? If you don’t see it in the headings  
listed here, try the Index on page 297.  
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i  
Adding a New People Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67  
Downloading Applications and Games From   
Text Messaging (SMS) and   
Connecting Your Device to the Internet Through   
Section 4: Safety and  
Important Health Information and   
Federal Communication Commission   
Telecommunications & Internet   
Introduction  
Your Device’s Menu  
This User Guide introduces you to Sprint® service and  
all the features of your new device. It’s divided into four  
sections:  
The following table outlines your device’s main menu  
structure. From the Home screen, press  
to open the  
menu. If the screen is locked, drag the ring upward  
until the Home screen opens.  
Tip:  
For most programs or games on the device, pressing  
brings up options available for the application or  
game.  
WARNING:  
Please refer to the Important Safety  
Information section on page 266 to learn  
about information that will help you safely use  
your device. Failure to read and follow the  
Important Safety Information in this device  
guide may result in serious bodily injury, death,  
or property damage.  
All apps  
Notifications  
Personalize  
1: Personalize display  
1: Scene  
2: Skin  
4: Lock screen  
3: Wallpaper  
i
   
5: Bluetooth settings  
2: Add items to Home  
1: Bluetooth  
3: Discoverable  
5: Scan for devices  
2: Device name  
4: Advanced Settings  
1: Widget  
3: Shortcut  
2: App  
4: Folder  
3: Personalize sound  
6: Sprint Hotspot  
1: Sound set  
2: Ringtone  
3: Notification sound  
4: Alarm  
7: Sprint Hotspot settings  
1: Router name (SSID) 2: Security  
Wallpaper  
3: Password  
4: Manage users  
1: HTC wallpapers  
3: Gallery  
2: Live wallpapers  
8: 4G  
9: 4G settings  
Ringtones  
Settings  
1: 4G  
3: Signal strength  
2: Network provider  
4: IP address  
10: VPN settings  
2: Wireless & networks  
1: Airplane mode  
11: Mobile network  
12: Mobile networks  
1: Data roaming sound 2: Roaming Guards  
2: Wi-Fi  
3: Roaming  
4: Domestic Voice  
6: International Voice  
8: Enable always-on  
mobile data  
5: Domestic Data  
7: International Data  
3: Wi-Fi settings  
1: Wi-Fi  
2: Network notification  
3: Wi-Fi Protected Setup 4: Add Wi-Fi network  
13: USB tethering  
4: Bluetooth  
14: USB tethering setting  
ii  
15: Internet Pass-through  
3: Call  
5: Display  
1: Auto-rotate screen  
3: Brightness  
5: Notification flash  
2: Animation  
4. Screen timeout  
6: G-Sensor calibration  
1: Voicemail  
1: Voicemail service  
3: Clear voicemail notification  
2: Voicemail settings  
6: Accounts & sync  
1: Background data  
2: Auto-sync  
2: Other call settings  
1: Hearing aids  
3: Home country  
5: TTY mode  
7: Voice Privacy  
9: Plus code dialing  
2: Phone settings  
4: Home dialing  
6: DDTM mode  
8: Automatic prepend  
3: Exchange ActiveSync (if available)  
1: General settings  
3: Contacts  
5: Update when opened 6: Update schedule  
2: Mail  
4: Calendar  
3: Internet call settings  
4: Facebook for HTC Sense (if available)  
1: Accounts  
2: Use Internet calling  
1: Sync live feed  
3: Sync contacts  
2: Sync Calendar  
4: Update schedule  
4: Sound  
1: Sound profile  
3: Vibrate  
5: Quiet ring on pickup 6: Pocket mode  
2: Volume  
4: Phone ringtone  
5: Flickr (if available)  
1: Sync stream  
3: Update schedule  
2: Sync contacts  
7: Flip for speaker  
8: Notification sound  
9: Audible touch tones 10: Audible selection  
11: Screen lock sounds 12: Vibrate feedback  
13: Emergency tone  
6: Google (if available)  
1: Sync contacts  
3: Sync Calendar  
2: Sync Gmail  
iii  
7: HTC Sense (if available)  
14: Weather  
1: Sync HTC Sense  
2: Sync HTC Hub  
1: Sync weather  
2: Update when opened  
3: Update when opened 4: Update schedule  
3: Update schedule  
8: Mail (if available)  
7: Location  
1: Account settings  
3: Update when opened 4: Update schedule  
2: Sync mail  
1: Use wireless networks 2: Location setting  
3: Use GPS satellites  
4: Phone finder  
9: Qik Video (if available)  
8: Search  
1: Account Settings  
2: Sync contacts  
1: Google search  
3: Clear shortcuts  
2: Searchable items  
10: Twitter for HTC Sense (if available)  
9: Privacy  
1: Sync Peep  
3: Update when opened 4: Update schedule  
2: Sync Friend  
1: Display message text on lock screen  
2: Back up my settings 3: Automatic restore  
11: Watch account  
10: Connect to PC  
1: Default connection type 2: Ask me  
11: Security  
1: Account Settings  
2: Update widget when opened  
12: News  
1: Sync news  
3: Update schedule  
2: Update when opened  
2: Update when opened  
1: Set up screen lock  
3: Set password  
5: Install from SD card  
2: Visible passwords  
4: Use secure credentials  
6: Clear all credentials  
13: Stocks  
12: Power  
1: Sync stock info  
3: Update schedule  
1: Enable power saver  
2: Turn power saver on at  
3: Power saver settings 4: Fast boot  
iv  
3: Touch Input  
13: Applications  
1: Keyboard types  
3: Bilingual prediction  
5: Chinese text input  
7: Trace keyboard  
2: International keyboard  
4: Text input  
6: Tutorial  
1: Unknown sources  
3: Running services  
5: Storage use  
2: Manage applications  
4: Development  
6: Start automatically  
8: Personal dictionary  
7: Notifications  
17: Accessibility  
14: SD & phone storage  
1: Total space  
2: Available space  
18: Voice input & output  
3: Unmount SD card  
5: Available space  
7: Factory data reset  
4: Erase SD card  
1: Voice recognizer settings  
2: Text-to-speech settings  
6: Make more space  
19: System updates  
15: Date & time  
1: Firmware update  
3: Update PRL  
2: Update profile  
4: HTC software update  
1: Automatic  
3: Select time zone  
5: Use 24-hour format  
2: Set date  
4: Set time  
6: Select date format  
20: About phone  
1: Tell HTC  
16: Language & keyboard  
1: Select language  
1: Report errors to HTC 2: Report preference  
3: Report usage to HTC 4: Send reports  
1: English  
2: Español  
2: Phone identity  
2: Swype  
1: Model number  
3: Phone number  
5: Current username  
2: MEID  
4: IMSI  
1: Language  
2: Word prediction  
4: Vibrate on keypress  
6: Auto-spacing  
3: Audio feedback  
5: Enable tip indicator  
7: Auto-capitalization  
8: Show complete trace  
9: Word choice window 10: Speed vs. accuracy  
11: Swype help 12: Tutorial  
v
3: Battery  
1: Battery status  
2: Battery level  
3: Battery use  
5: Awake time  
4: Up time  
4: Hardware information  
1: Hardware version  
3: Memory  
2: Processor  
4: Display  
5: Main camera  
7: Wi-Fi  
9: Bluetooth  
6: Front camera  
8: Wi-Fi MAC address  
10: Bluetooth address  
11: 4G MAC address  
5: Software information  
1: Android version  
3: Software number  
5: PRI Version  
2: HTC Sense version  
4: More  
6: PRL Version  
6: Legal information  
1: HTC legal  
2: Sprint legal  
3: Google legal  
4: Open source licenses  
vi  
Section 1  
Getting Started  
   
Setting Up Your Device  
1A. Setting Up Service  
1. Install the battery.  
Insert a coin or other flat object into the slot at the  
bottom of the battery compartment cover and lift  
the cover up gently to remove.  
Insert the battery, contacts end first, and then  
gently press the battery into place.  
2
     
Replace the battery compartment cover, making  
sure all the locking tabs are seated and there are  
no gaps around the cover.  
Activating Your Device  
If you purchased your device at a Sprint Store, it is  
probably activated and ready to use.  
2. Press  
to turn the device on.  
If you received your device in the mail and it is for a new  
Sprint account or a new line of service, it is designed to  
activate automatically. To confirm your activation,  
make a phone call.  
If your device is activated, it will turn on, search for  
Sprint service, and enter standby mode.  
If your device is not yet activated, see “Activating  
Your Device” for more information.  
If you received your device in the mail and you are  
activating a new device for an existing number on your  
account, you will need to go online to activate your  
new device.  
Note: When you turn on your device for the first time, you will be  
given options to let you quickly set up various accounts,  
such as your Google account, Facebook, Flickr, Twitter,  
Microsoft® Exchange ActiveSync®, and other email  
accounts. We recommend that you skip these.  
From your computer’s Web browser, go to  
sprint.com/activate and complete the onscreen  
instructions to activate your device.  
3. Make your first call.  
Tap  
.
When you have finished, make a phone call to  
confirm your activation. If your device is still not  
activated or you do not have access to the Internet,  
contact Sprint Customer Service at 1-888-211-4727  
for assistance.  
Use the onscreen keypad to enter a phone  
number.  
Tap  
.
Note: Your device’s battery should have enough charge for  
your device to turn on and find a signal, set up your  
voicemail, and make a call. You should fully charge  
your battery as soon as possible. See “Charging the  
Battery” on page 20 for details.  
Tip: Do not press  
activated. Pressing  
process.  
while the device is being  
cancels the activation  
3
   
Note: If you are having difficulty with activation, contact Sprint  
Customer Service by dialing 1-888-211-4727 from any  
other phone.  
Note: Voicemail Password  
Sprint strongly recommends that you create a  
password when setting up your voicemail to protect  
against unauthorized access. Without a password,  
anyone who has access to your device is able to  
access your voicemail messages.  
Setting Up Your Voicemail  
Your device automatically transfers all unanswered calls  
to your voicemail, even if your device is in use or turned  
off. You should set up your Sprint Voicemail and personal  
greeting as soon as your device is activated. Always use  
a password to protect against unauthorized access.  
Sprint Account Passwords  
As a Sprint customer, you enjoy unlimited access to  
your personal account information, your voicemail  
account, and your data services account. To ensure  
that no one else has access to your information, you  
will need to create passwords to protect your privacy.  
1. Press  
and tap  
> Voicemail.  
2. In the Personalize your voicemail window, tap  
Personalize now.  
Account User Name and Password  
3. Your device will automatically connect with Sprint  
voicemail service. Follow the system prompts to:  
If you are the account owner, you will create an account  
user name and password when you sign on to  
sprint.com. (Click Sign in and then click Sign up now! to  
get started.) If you are not the account owner (if  
someone else receives the bill for your Sprint service),  
you can get a sub-account password at sprint.com.  
Create your password.  
Record your name announcement.  
Record your greeting.  
For more information about using your voicemail, see  
4
       
Voicemail Password  
Getting Help  
You’ll create your voicemail password when you set up  
your voicemail. See “Setting Up Your Voicemail” for  
more information on your voicemail password.  
Managing Your Account  
Online: www.sprint.com  
Access your account information.  
Data Services Password  
With your Sprint device, you may elect to set up an  
optional data services password to control access and  
authorize Premium Service purchases.  
Check your minutes used (depending on your Sprint  
service plan).  
View and pay your bill.  
For more information, or to change your passwords,  
sign on to sprint.com or call Sprint Customer Service at  
1-888-211-4727.  
Enroll in Sprint online billing and automatic payment.  
Purchase accessories.  
Shop for the latest Sprint phones.  
View available Sprint service plans and options.  
Learn more about data services and other products  
like games, ring tones, screen savers, and more.  
5
   
From Your Sprint Phone  
Sprint 411  
1. Press  
and tap  
.
Sprint 411 gives you access to a variety of services and  
information, including residential, business, and  
government listings; movie listings or showtimes;  
driving directions, restaurant reservations, and major  
local event information. You can get up to three pieces  
of information per call, and the operator can  
2. Do any of the following:  
Tap  
to check minute  
to make a  
usage and account balance.  
Tap  
payment.  
Tap  
summary of your Sprint service plan or get  
answers to other questions.  
automatically connect your call at no additional charge.  
to access a  
There is a per-call charge to use Sprint 411, and you  
will be billed for airtime.  
Tap  
.
From Any Other Phone  
Sprint Customer Service: 1-888-211-4727.  
Business Customer Service: 1-888-788-4727.  
Sprint Operator Services  
Sprint Operator Services provides assistance when you  
place collect calls or when you place calls billed to a  
local telephone calling card or third party.  
Tap  
.
For more information or to see the latest in products  
and services, visit us online at sprint.com.  
6
   
Section 2  
Your Device  
   
Your Device  
2A. Device Basics  
1
2
10  
9
3
4
Tip: Device Software Upgrades – Updates to your device’s  
software may become available from time to time. Sprint  
will automatically send critical updates to your device.  
You can also check for and download updates by  
8
7
5
6
pressing  
>
, and then tapping Settings > System  
updates > Firmware update to search for and  
download available updates.  
8
     
8. Back Key allows you to go back to the previous  
screen, or close a dialog box, options menu, the  
Notifications panel, or onscreen keyboard.  
Key Functions  
1. Earpiece lets you hear the caller and automated  
prompts.  
9. Front Camera allows you to take photos and videos  
or start a video call.  
2. Proximity Sensor automatically switches the display  
screen off when you hold the device near your  
face during a call. When activated, the proximity  
sensor does not affect the device’s 3G, 4G, or  
Wi-Fi connection.  
10. Front Indicator Light (LED) shows your device’s  
status or pending notifications at a glance.  
11  
12  
3. Display Screen displays all the information needed  
to operate your device, such as the call status, the  
People list, the date and time, and the signal and  
battery strength.  
11. 3.5 mm Headset Jack allows you to plug in either a  
stereo headset or an optional headset for  
convenient, hands-free conversations.  
4. Menu Key allows you to open a list of actions that  
CAUTION! Inserting an accessory into the incorrect  
jack may damage the device.  
you can do on the current screen.  
5. Home Key takes you back to the Home screen.  
When in standby mode, press and hold to open  
the recently used applications window.  
12. Power Button lets you turn the device on or off, turn  
the screen on or off, restart the device, or switch  
the device to airplane mode.  
6. Microphone allows other callers to hear you clearly  
when you are speaking to them.  
7. Search Key allows you to search information on the  
current screen or application. For example, while in  
People, press  
to search for a contact.  
9
 
13. Volume Buttons allow you to adjust the ringer or  
media volume or adjust the voice volume during a  
call.  
17  
14. Dual flash helps illuminate subjects in low-light  
environments when the camera is focusing and  
capturing a photo or video.  
19  
18  
15. 2D/3D Switch allows you to set the camera to  
13  
14  
capture photos or videos in 2D or 3D.  
16. Camera Button allows you to launch the camera. If  
the camera is activated, press this button to  
capture the photo or start recording video.  
17  
17. Camera lenses allow you to capture high-definition  
photos and videos in 2D or 3D.  
15  
16  
18. Charger/Accessory Jack allows you to connect the  
device charger or the USB cable (included).  
CAUTION! Inserting an accessory into the incorrect  
jack may damage the device.  
19. Speaker lets you hear the different ringers and  
sounds. The speaker also lets you hear the caller’s  
voice in speakerphone mode.  
10  
Restarting Your Device  
Turning Your Device On and Off  
Note: Restarting the device will close all running apps and  
will clear all temporary files in the device’s memory.  
Make sure to save your work before restarting the  
device.  
Turning Your Device On  
Press  
at the top of the device.  
1. Press and hold  
for about two seconds.  
2. On the Power options menu, tap Restart.  
3. In the Restart phone confirmation box, tap Restart.  
Turning the Screen Off When Not in Use  
Turning Your Device Off  
To save battery power, the device automatically turns  
off the screen after a certain period of time when you  
leave it idle. You will still be able to receive messages  
and calls while the device’s screen is off.  
1. Press and hold  
for about two seconds.  
Note: When the screen is locked and you press  
, it  
will only turn off the screen and not the device. You will  
need to unlock the screen first before you press and  
hold  
to turn the device off. See “Turning the  
Tip: For information on how to adjust the time before the  
2. On the Power options menu, tap Power off.  
You can also turn off and lock the screen by pressing  
. Pressing  
again or receiving an  
incoming call will turn on your device screen and show  
the lock screen.  
11  
       
Using the Lock Screen  
Aside from protecting the device’s screen from  
unwanted taps, the lock screen also displays important  
information, updates, and messages at a glance, or  
provide shortcut icons to your favorite applications.  
To unlock the screen:  
1. When the screen is off, press  
the lock screen.  
to show  
2. Drag the ring up to unlock the screen. When you  
have an incoming call, dragging the ring up  
answers the call.  
– or –  
Drag a shortcut icon, a photo, or a message board  
to the ring to unlock the screen and launch the  
related application.  
Note: If you have set up a screen lock, you will be prompted  
to draw the pattern, enter the PIN, or enter the  
password. For more information on how to create and  
enable a screen lock, see “Protecting Your Device with  
12  
     
Viewing the Display Screen  
Status Bar – Notification Icons  
Upcoming event  
Your device’s display screen provides information  
about notifications and your device’s status. This list  
identifies the symbols you’ll see on your device’s  
display screen:  
Music is playing  
General notification (for example, sync error)  
Storage card is low on free space  
Status Bar – Notification Icons  
Wi-Fi is on and wireless networks are  
available  
New Text or Multimedia Message  
4G is on and 4G networks are available  
New Voicemail  
Data synchronizing – connected to HTC  
Sync  
New Gmail message  
New location detected  
New Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync or  
POP3/IMAP email message  
More (undisplayed) notifications  
Call in progress (Voice Privacy locked)  
Call in progress (Voice Privacy unlocked)  
Problem with Text/Multimedia Message  
delivery  
New instant message from Google Talk  
13  
   
Status Bar – Notification Icons  
Missed call  
Status Bar – Device Status Icons  
Uploading data (animated)  
Downloading data (animated)  
Waiting to upload  
Signal Strength  
(More bars = stronger signal)  
No Service  
Device is “roaming” off the Nationwide Sprint  
Network  
Content downloaded  
Sprint 3G data service (EVDO) available  
Device connected to computer via USB  
cable  
Sprint 3G data service (EVDO) available and  
active (with icon animation)  
Storage card is safe to remove or storage  
card is being prepared  
Sprint 3G data service is currently  
unavailable  
No storage card installed in the device  
New tweet  
Sprint 1xRTT network available  
Sprint 1xRTT network available and active  
(with icon animation)  
Updates available for an application  
Sprint 1xRTT network is currently unavailable  
14  
Status Bar – Device Status Icons  
Status Bar – Device Status Icons  
Device’s location feature is on and available  
for location-based services such as GPS  
Navigation  
Speakerphone on  
Wired microphone headset connected  
Wired headset connected  
Device’s location feature off and your  
location is available only for 911  
Device microphone muted  
Device speaker muted  
Vibrate mode  
Connected to Wi-Fi network  
Connected to a 4G network  
Sprint Hotspot is on and is ready to share its  
4G connection  
Shows current battery charge level   
(Icon shown is fully charged)  
Sprint Hotspot is on and is ready to share its  
3G connection  
Bluetooth on  
Connected to Bluetooth device  
Airplane mode  
Alarm set  
15  
 
Notifications Panel  
When you get a new notification, you can open the  
Notifications panel to see the message, reminder or  
event notification. The Notifications panel lets you  
quickly switch between recently opened apps, and also  
lets you easily turn on settings such as 4G, Wi-Fi and  
Bluetooth.  
To open the Notifications panel:  
To open the Notifications panel, press and hold the  
status bar, and then slide your finger downward.  
If you have several notifications, you can scroll down  
the screen to view more notifications.  
Tip: You can also open the Notifications panel from the  
Home screen by pressing  
and then tapping  
Notifications.  
Tap a notification to  
open the related  
application.  
Press and hold, and  
then drag up to close  
the Notifications panel.  
To close the Notifications panel:  
Press and hold the bottom bar of the Notifications  
panel, and then drag it up the screen.  
– or –  
Press  
.
16  
   
To switch between recently opened apps:  
To use Quick Settings:  
On the Notifications panel, you can easily access up to  
eight apps you just recently opened.  
The Quick Settings tab lets you easily turn on 4G, Wi-Fi,  
Bluetooth, GPS, and more, and also provides a quick  
shortcut to all device settings.  
1. Open the Notifications panel.  
1. Open the Notifications panel.  
2. In the Recent applications section, slide your finger  
left or right to see recently opened apps.  
2. Tap the Quick Settings tab.  
3. Tap the check box next to an item to turn it off or  
on.  
3. Tap an application to open it.  
Tip: Press and hold  
to view recently opened applications.  
17  
Notification LED  
Battery and Charger  
The Notification LED located near the right end of the  
earpiece provides information on the device status or  
pending notifications.  
WARNING: Use only Sprint-approved or HTC-approved  
batteries and chargers with your device. The  
failure to use an Sprint-approved or   
HTC-approved battery and charger may  
increase the risk that your device will overheat,  
catch fire, or explode, resulting in serious bodily  
injury, death, or property damage.  
Sprint-approved or HTC-approved batteries and  
accessories can be found at Sprint Stores or through  
HTC; or call 1-866-866-7509 to order. They’re also  
available at sprint.com.  
LED Status  
Indication  
Solid green  
Battery is fully charged (when the  
device is connected to the AC adapter  
or a computer).  
Battery Capacity  
Solid red  
Battery is charging.  
Your device is equipped with a rechargeable battery.  
The battery provides up to 6 hours of continuous talk  
Flashing red  
Flashing green  
Battery is low. (Power is below 14%.)  
You have a pending notification (for  
example, a new message or a missed  
call).  
Note: Long backlight settings, searching for service, vibrate  
mode, browser use, and other variables may reduce  
the battery’s talk and standby times.  
Note: The indicators are listed in order of priority. For  
example, if your device is connected to the AC adapter  
and the battery is charging, the LED will be solid red  
and will not switch to a flashing green light even if there  
is a pending notification.  
Tip: Watch your device’s battery level indicator and charge  
the battery before it runs out of power.  
18  
       
3. Replace the battery compartment cover and press  
until it snaps into place, making sure all the locking  
tabs are seated and there are no gaps around the  
cover.  
Installing the Battery  
1. With the device turned off, insert a coin or other flat  
object into the slot at the bottom of the battery  
compartment cover and lift up gently to remove.  
Removing the Battery  
1. Make sure the power is off so that you don’t lose  
any stored numbers or messages.  
2. Remove the battery compartment cover.  
(See step 1 of “Installing the Battery.”)  
3. Lift the battery out at the notch at the bottom of the  
battery compartment.  
2. Insert the contact end of the battery first, and then  
gently push the battery into place.  
WARNING: Do not handle a damaged or leaking Li-Ion  
battery as you can be burned.  
19  
 
2. Plug the AC adapter in to an electrical outlet to  
Charging the Battery  
start charging the battery.  
Keeping track of your battery’s charge is important. If  
your battery level becomes too low, your device  
automatically turns off, and you will lose any  
information you were just working on.  
Charging is indicated by a solid red light in the  
Notification LED. As the battery is being charged while  
the device is on, the charging battery icon (  
) is  
displayed in the status bar of the Home screen. After  
the battery has been fully charged, the Notification LED  
shows a solid green light and a full battery icon (  
displays in the status bar of the Home screen.  
Always use a Sprint-approved or HTC-approved  
desktop charger, travel charger, or vehicle power  
adapter to charge your battery.  
)
Tip: With the Sprint-approved Li-ion battery, you can recharge  
For more information about Notifications, see  
the battery before it becomes completely run down.  
1. Plug the USB connector of the AC adapter into the  
charger/accessory jack on the upper left side of  
your device.  
20  
     
Swipe, Slide or Drag  
Getting Around Your Device  
To swipe or slide  
means to quickly drag  
your finger vertically or  
horizontally across the  
screen.  
There are different ways to navigate around your  
device’s Home screen, menus, and application  
screens.  
Tap  
To drag, press and  
hold your finger with  
some pressure before you start to move your finger.  
While dragging, do not release your finger until you  
have reached the target position.  
When you want to type using the  
onscreen keyboard, select items  
on the screen such as  
application and settings icons or  
buttons, simply tap them with  
your finger.  
Flick  
Flicking the screen is similar to  
swiping, except that you need to  
swipe your finger in light, quick  
strokes. This finger gesture is  
always in a vertical direction,  
such as when flicking the  
Press and Hold  
To open the available options for  
an item (for example, contact or  
link in a Web page), simply press  
and hold the item.  
contacts or message list.  
21  
   
Rotate  
Pinch and Spread  
For most screens, you can  
automatically change the  
screen orientation from  
portrait to landscape by  
turning the device  
sideways. When entering  
text, you can turn the device  
sideways to bring up a  
bigger keyboard. See  
“Pinch” the screen  
using your thumb and  
forefinger to zoom out  
or “spread” the screen  
to zoom in when  
viewing a picture or a  
Web page. (Move  
fingers inward to zoom  
out and outward to  
zoom in.)  
Keyboard” for more details.  
Note: The Auto-rotate screen check box in  
>
>
Settings > Display needs to be selected for the screen  
orientation to automatically change.  
22  
 
Displaying Your Phone Number  
Note: Smart Dial will also search your contacts if you enter the  
letters in the name of a contact using the letters on the  
number pad. As you enter more letters or numbers, the  
list shows only the corresponding matches.  
Press  
>
and tap Settings > About phone >  
Phone identity. (Your phone number and other  
information about your device and account will be  
displayed.)  
1. Press  
and tap  
.
2. Begin entering the first few digits or characters by  
Making and Answering Calls  
tapping the keys on the Phone keypad. If you enter  
an incorrect digit, tap  
to erase it. To erase the  
entire number, press and hold  
.
Making Calls  
There are several convenient methods to make a call  
from your device.  
3. Tap the phone number or contact from the list.  
– or –  
To call a different phone number associated with  
the contact, tap the contact card icon at the right  
side of the contact name. On the contact details  
screen, tap the number you want to call.  
Calling Using the Phone Dialer  
You can dial a number directly in the Phone’s dialer. As  
you enter the first digits of the phone number, Smart  
Dial searchs for contacts that match. If you see the  
number that you want, you can tap it to dial it  
immediately without entering the rest of the phone  
number.  
Tip: Tap  
to close the Phone keypad and to see if there  
are more matching numbers or contacts. To browse  
through the filtered list, flick through the list or slide  
your finger up or down the list slowly.  
23  
           
You can also place calls from your device using your  
History listings (page 60) and Automatic Speech  
Recognition (page 121).  
Calling a Phone Number in a Text Message  
While viewing a text message, you can place a call to a  
number that is in the body of the message.  
Receiving Calls  
1. Press  
and tap  
> Messages.  
2. Tap the message with the phone number, and  
When you receive a phone call from a contact, the  
Incoming call screen appears and displays the caller  
ID icon, name, and phone number of the calling party.  
When you receive a phone call from someone who is  
not stored in People, only the default caller ID icon and  
phone number appear on the Incoming call screen.  
then tap the phone number.  
3. On the Verify the phone number screen, tap Call.  
Your device then dials the phone number.  
For more information about text messages, see “Text  
Note: If your device is turned off, all calls automatically go to  
voicemail.  
Calling a Phone Number in an Email Message  
Answering an Incoming Call  
While viewing an email message, you can tap a phone  
number within the body of the email message to open  
the Phone screen and dial the selected number.  
If the display is on, tap Answer.  
If the display is off, the display will come on with the  
Lock screen. To answer the call, pull the ring up, or  
press and hold the Answer button and then drag it  
to the ring.  
Calling a Speed Dial Number  
To call a stored speed dial number, press and hold a  
number key. For information on setting up speed dial  
24  
       
Muting the Ringing Sound  
Rejecting a Call and Sending a Text Message  
To mute the ringer without rejecting the call, you can do  
any of the following:  
You can automatically send a default text message to a  
caller and reject the incoming voice call. Press  
and  
tap Send message when you have an incoming call to  
send the text message.  
Press the volume down button.  
Press and tap Mute.  
While on the Phone screen, you can change the default  
Place the device face down on a level surface.  
(You can do this even on the Lock screen.)  
text message by pressing  
and tapping Settings >  
Edit default message.  
Using the Quiet Ring on Pickup Feature  
Answering a Roam Call With Call Guard Enabled  
Your device automatically reduces the ringer volume  
when you pick up the device to answer calls.  
Call Guard is an option that helps you manage your  
roaming charges when making or receiving calls while  
outside the Nationwide Sprint Network. See “Roaming”  
on page 175 for more information.  
1. Press  
>
, and then tap Settings > Sound.  
2. Scroll down the screen, and then select the Quiet  
ring on pickup check box.  
Tap Answer to answer the call. (See “Roaming  
Guards” on page 176 for more information.)  
3. Press  
.
Note: If your device is turned off, all calls automatically go to  
voicemail.  
Rejecting an Incoming Call  
If the display is on, tap Decline.  
Ending a Call  
If the display is off, the display will come on with  
the Lock screen. Press and hold the Decline button  
and then drag it to the ring to reject and send the  
call to your voicemail.  
Tap End call.  
25  
To call the 911 emergency number normally or when your  
account is restricted:  
Missed Call Notification  
When you do not answer an incoming call, you will see  
1. Unlock the screen. For more information, see  
the missed call icon  
in the status bar.  
To see who the caller was, press and hold the status  
bar, and then drag downward on the screen to open  
the Notifications panel. The missed call number or  
contact name is displayed.  
2. Tap  
on the Home screen.  
3. Tap  
.
Enhanced 911 (E911) Information  
Tap the missed call number or contact name to open  
the Call history. Missed calls are indicated by the  
This device features an embedded Global Positioning  
System (GPS) chip necessary for utilizing E911  
emergency location services where available.  
missed call icon (  
).  
Calling Emergency Numbers  
You can place calls to 911 even if the device’s screen is  
locked or your account is restricted.  
When you place an emergency 911 call, the GPS  
feature of your device seeks information to calculate  
your approximate location. Depending on several  
variables, including availability and access to satellite  
signals, it may take up to 30 seconds or more to  
determine and report your approximate location.  
To call the 911 emergency number when the device’s  
screen is locked with a screen lock:  
1. Unlock the screen. For more information, see  
Important: Always report your location to the 911 operator  
when placing an emergency call. Some  
designated emergency call takers, known as  
Public Safety Answering Points (PSAPs), may not  
be equipped to receive GPS location information  
from your device.  
2. Tap Emergency call on the screen.  
3. Tap  
.
26  
     
In-Call Options  
End-of-Call Options  
Pressing  
during a call displays a list of available   
After you receive a call from or make a call to a phone  
number that is not in your People list, you can choose  
to save the number to People. On the Phone screen,  
in-call features. Tap an option to select it.  
The following options may be available through the  
Options menu:  
tap  
at the right side of the number to add the new  
number to People.  
Note: When the device is completing a call, only the People,  
Flash, and Speaker on options are available.  
Tip: After receiving a call from a phone number that is not in  
your People list, an options menu is briefly displayed to  
allow you to save the number to People. On the options  
menu, tap Yes, create new contact.  
Add call to initiate a three-way call.  
People to display your contacts list.  
Flash to accept another incoming call and put the first  
caller on hold. Tap Flash again to talk to the first caller.  
Saving a Phone Number  
Mute to mute the microphone. Tap Unmute to unmute  
the microphone.  
You can store contacts entries in your device. Your  
device automatically sorts People entries  
alphabetically. (For more information, see “About  
Speaker on or Speaker off to route the device’s audio  
through the speaker or through the earpiece.  
To save a number from standby mode:  
Tap Speaker On to route the device’s audio through  
the speaker. (You can adjust the speaker volume  
by pressing the volume up or down button.)  
1. Press  
and tap  
.
2. Enter the phone number by tapping the keys on  
the keypad.  
Tap Speaker Off to use the device’s earpiece.  
WARNING: Because of higher volume levels, do not place the  
3. Tap Save to People. (This button appears after  
tapping six digits.)  
device near your ear during speakerphone use.  
27  
   
4. Tap Create new contact or Save to existing contact.  
Speed Dialing  
5. Use the keyboard to enter the new contact name  
and tap Save to save the new entry.  
Your device can store up to nine phone numbers in  
speed dial locations.  
– or –  
To assign a speed dial number to a People entry:  
Tap an existing contact name and tap Save to save  
the new number.  
1. Press  
and tap  
entry in People.  
> People, and then tap an  
Finding a Phone Number  
You can search People for entries by name.  
2. Press and tap Set speed dial.  
3. Tap the list menu under Number to select a  
number from the contact to assign to speed dial.  
1. Press  
and tap  
> People.  
2. Press  
, tap the Search people bar and enter the  
4. Tap the list menu under Location to assign the  
first letter or letters of an entry. (The more letters  
you enter, the more specific the search.)  
number to a speed dial location.  
5. Tap Save.  
3. Tap the contact to display the contact’s phone  
number(s).  
Note: If you assign a number to an already in-use speed dial  
location, the new phone number will automatically  
replace the previous speed dial assignment.  
Dialing From the People List  
1. Press  
and tap  
> People.  
2. Tap the entry you want to call.  
3. Tap Call [Type of Number]. (For example, Call  
mobile.)  
28  
       
To call using Speed Dial:  
Entering Text  
Press and hold the appropriate key on the Phone  
keypad for approximately two seconds.  
The display confirms that you have dialed the  
number when it shows “Dialing” on the upper right  
side of the screen.  
Using the Onscreen Keyboard  
When you start a program or select a box that requires  
entry of text or numbers, the onscreen keyboard  
becomes available. You can choose from three  
keyboard layouts: Standard, Phone, and Compact.  
Finding Speed Dial Numbers  
1. Press  
and tap  
.
Changing to Landscape Orientation  
2. Press  
and Speed dial.  
When entering text, you can choose to use the  
landscape orientation of the onscreen keyboard by  
turning the device sideways. This pops up a larger  
Standard keyboard that lets you type easily using two  
thumbs  
3. Tap a speed dial entry to call the contact.  
Tip: While on the Speed dial screen, tap Add new or press  
and tap Add to add new speed dial entries from People.  
Note: The landscape orientation keyboard is not supported in  
Dialing Sprint Services  
all applications.  
Dial the appropriate service number:  
Customer Service –  
Sprint 411 –  
Account Information –  
Sprint Operator –  
29  
           
Changing the Onscreen Keyboard Layout  
Entering Text  
You can choose from three different keyboard layouts  
to suit your typing style. To change the keyboard layout,  
do the following:  
Use the following keys while entering text using the  
onscreen keyboard:  
Press and hold keys with gray characters at the  
top to enter numbers, symbols, or accented  
letters. The gray character displayed on the key is  
the character that will be inserted when you press  
and hold that key. Some keys have multiple  
characters or accents associated with them.  
1. Press  
>
, and then tap Settings >   
Language & keyboard > Touch Input.  
2. Tap Keyboard types, and then select from the  
following keyboard types:  
Standard. This layout is similar to a desktop  
computer keyboard. This is the default keyboard  
layout.  
Shift key. Tap to capitalize the next letter you  
enter. Tap twice to turn on caps lock.  
Numeric key. Tap to switch to the numeric and  
symbol keyboard.  
Phone. This layout resembles a traditional wireless  
phone keypad.  
Alphabet key. Tap to switch to the alphabetic  
keyboard.  
Compact. This layout features two letters on each  
key. The keys are slightly larger than on the  
standard layout.  
Enter key. Tap to create a new line.  
Backspace key. Tap to delete the previous  
character. Press and hold to delete multiple  
characters.  
Voice input key. Tap to speak the words you want  
30  
       
If you see the word you want shown in the  
suggestions before you have finished typing the  
entire word, tap the word to insert it into your text.  
Tap to hide the onscreen keyboard.  
Tap to toggle between Multitap and XT9  
predictive modes when using the Compact or  
Phone layout. (See “Predictive Text” for details.)  
If an arrow is shown to the right of the suggestion list,  
tap the arrow to see more suggestions.  
Adding a Word to the Predictive Text Dictionary  
Predictive Text  
Your device comes with a list of words that it references  
for predictive text suggestions. Sometimes you may  
need to add a word to the predictive text dictionary, for  
example a name or a specialized technical word.  
The onscreen keyboard has predictive text to help you  
type quickly and accurately. Predictive text input is  
enabled by default, and word suggestions are  
displayed as you type.  
While entering text using the Standard keyboard layout,  
if you tap any word on the suggestion list, it is  
automatically added to the predictive text dictionary if it  
was not in the dictionary already.  
To manually add a word to the predictive text dictionary:  
To enter a word in predictive mode, do any of the  
following:  
1. Press  
>
, and then tap Settings > Language &  
keyboard > Touch Input > Personal dictionary.  
2. Tap Edit personal dictionary and then tap Add new.  
3. Enter the word to add, and then tap OK.  
If you see the word you want highlighted in green or  
orange, you can simply tap the space bar to insert  
the word into your text.  
31  
   
Editing or Deleting a Word in Your Personal  
Dictionary  
Backing up Your Personal Dictionary to Your  
Storage Card  
You can edit or remove words that you previously  
added to the predictive text dictionary.  
You can use your microSD storage card to back up the  
new words you’ve added to your personal dictionary.  
1. Press  
>
, and then tap Settings > Language &  
1. Press  
>
, and then tap Settings > Language &  
keyboard > Touch Input > Personal dictionary.  
keyboard > Touch Input.  
2. Tap Edit personal dictionary.  
2. Tap Personal dictionary > Sync personal dictionary >  
Copy to storage card.  
3. To edit a word, tap the word, enter your changes,  
and then tap OK.  
3. When prompted, tap OK.  
– or –  
Restoring Your Personal Dictionary from Your  
Storage Card  
To delete a word, press  
the X icon to the right of the word.  
, tap Delete and then tap  
1. Press  
>
and then tap Settings > Language &  
keyboard > Touch Input.  
2. Tap Personal dictionary > Sync personal dictionary >  
Restore from storage card.  
3. When prompted, tap OK.  
32  
 
Phone & Compact  
Adjusting Touch Input Settings  
Spell correction: Correct typographical errors  
Press  
>
, and tap Settings > Language &  
by selecting from a list of possible words that  
reflect the characters of the keys you have  
tapped as well as characters of nearby keys.  
keyboard > Touch Input.  
Touch Input Settings  
Word completion: Select from a list of possible  
combinations based on the characters that  
appear on the keys that you tapped.  
Keyboard types lets you select the keyboard layout to  
use. You can choose from Standard, Phone, or  
Compact.  
Other settings  
International keyboard lets you add or remove  
languages from the onscreen keyboard language list.  
Sound feedback: Cause keys to audibly click  
when tapped.  
Bilingual prediction lets you activate word prediction  
for a second language.  
Vibrate when typing: Cause keys to vibrate  
when tapped.  
Finger touch precision  
Text input lets you set text input options when  
entering text, calibrate the keyboard, and set sound  
or vibration feedback whenever you tap a key.  
Calibration tool: Lets you recalibrate the  
keyboard if you feel that the keys are not  
responding accurately to your taps.  
Standard  
Prediction: Enable the word prediction feature.  
Reset calibration: Reset the calibration back to  
Spell correction: Correct typographical errors  
by selecting from a list of possible words  
based on the keys you have tapped as well as  
neighboring keys.  
factory default.  
Chinese Text input lets you set options when entering  
text in Chinese.  
33  
Pinyin: Choose Traditional Chinese or Simplified  
Chinese. In Simplified Chinese, you can enable  
Fuzzy Pinyin pairs.  
Using Swype to Enter Text  
Aside from the touch input keyboards, you can also  
use Swype® to trace the letters of the word that you  
want to enter. With Swype, you slide your finger on the  
onscreen keyboard to enter words. For example, if you  
want to type “the”, put your finger on the “t” key, and  
then trace the word (by sliding your finger) “the” on the  
onscreen keyboard.  
Stroke: Choose Traditional Chinese or Simplified  
Chinese mode.  
Tutorial lets you go through tutorials to learn how to  
use the onscreen keyboard features.  
Trace keyboard lets you choose the pen color and  
pen width to use when tracing letters on the  
keyboard.  
Personal dictionary lets you add, edit, or remove  
words in the predictive text dictionary. For more  
Adjusting Swype Settings  
Press  
>
and then tap Settings > Language &  
keyboard > Swype.  
– or –  
While using the Swype keyboard, tap  
and then  
tap Options.  
34  
   
Switching Between Touch Input and  
Swype Keyboard  
By default, your device uses the touch input method.  
You can choose to change the input method so you  
can use Swype.  
Home Screen  
The Home screen is the starting point for many  
applications and functions. The Home screen allows  
you to add items like application icons, shortcuts,  
folders, and widgets to give you instant access to  
information and applications.  
1. On an application (for example, Messages) that  
lets you enter text, press and hold the text box.  
1
2. Tap Input method, and then select the input  
method you want to use.  
2
5
4
3
35  
   
1. Status Bar: Displays device status and notification  
13 for a list of icons you will see on the status bar.  
Extended Screens  
Besides the Home screen, you can access six  
additional screens to provide more space for adding  
icons, widgets, and more. Press  
across the screen to move from the Home screen to an  
extended screen.  
2. Application icon: Tap to open the related  
application.  
, and then drag  
3. All apps: Tap to open the All apps screen. The All  
apps screen holds all applications on your device.  
There are six extended screens besides the main  
Home screen.  
4. Personalize: Tap to personalize or add items to the  
Home screen or to an extended screen, or change  
the sound settings of your device.  
5. Phone: Tap to open the Phone screen to make  
calls.  
Tip: While in any application, press  
to go back to the  
Home screen.  
36  
 
1. Pinch the Home screen to display thumbnail  
images of all the screens.  
Note: You cannot add more screens.  
2. Press and hold the thumbnail of the home screen  
you want to move. Your device vibrates. Don’t lift  
your finger just yet.  
Tip: While on an extended screen, press  
to return to the  
main Home screen.  
To go directly to a particular screen:  
1. Pinch the Home screen to display thumbnail  
images of all the screens.  
Tip: On the Home screen, you can press  
to show the  
thumbnail overview.  
2. Tap the screen you want to open.  
Rearranging the Home Screen  
Reorder your Home screen panels in any way that fits  
how you use them. For example, move the panels with  
frequently-used widgets, shortcuts, and folders closer  
to the main Home screen.  
Note: The center thumbnail in is always the main Home  
screen.  
3. Drag the thumbnail to its new position, and then lift  
your finger.  
37  
Folder: Add a folder where you can organize  
screen items. Add a shortcut to all your contacts,  
contacts with phone numbers, or starred contacts.  
Contact details are automatically updated when  
there are changes in the source.  
Customizing the Home Screen  
To add a Home screen item:  
1. Press  
and tap  
.
Note: You can also press and hold an empty area on the  
Customize any screen by adding application shortcuts  
and widgets. You can also use preset widgets from a  
Home screen.  
2. On the Add items to Home section, tap the item  
you want to add to the Home screen or an  
extended screen:  
Scene. To use a Scene, press  
and tap  
> Scene.  
To add a widget:  
1. Press  
and tap  
> Widget.  
Widget: Add HTC or Android™ widgets to a  
screen such as a clock, calendar, mail, people,  
Footprints, and more.  
2. Select a widget to add to a screen, and then select  
a layout to use, when available.  
App: Add shortcuts to applications on your  
device. To quickly add an application shortcut that  
is on the All apps screen to a screen, press and  
hold an application icon. When the device  
vibrates, drag the icon to an empty area on the  
screen, and then release it.  
Note: Most HTC widgets offer various layouts and sizes to fit  
your needs.  
3. Tap Select.  
Note: Your device places the widget on an available home  
screen. You may need remove a widget on the screen  
first if there is no space to place the new widget.  
Shortcut: Add shortcuts to bookmarked Web  
page, a favorite contact, a Gmail™ label, a music  
playlist, and more.  
38  
             
To edit or reposition a screen item:  
To create a folder and add items to it:  
1. Press and hold the item on the Home screen you  
want to edit or reposition. The item then expands  
and the device vibrates. Don’ lift your finger just yet.  
You can create folders on a screen to hold application  
icons or shortcuts.  
1. Press  
and tap  
folder appears on the screen.  
> Folder > New folder. A new  
2. To reposition the item, drag it to the position you  
want on the screen, and then release it.  
2. Press and hold an application icon or a shortcut  
on the screen, and then drag it on top of the folder.  
– or –  
To edit the item (when editing is available), drag it  
to the Edit button  
To access the items inside a folder, tap the folder to  
open it and then tap the icon of the application or  
shortcut you want to open.  
Note: To move an item from the Home screen to an  
extended screen, press and hold the item and then  
drag it to the left or right edge of the screen until the  
display shifts to the extended screen. Position the item  
on the screen, and then release it.  
Note: To delete a folder, follow the same procedure as you  
would for removing a screen item.  
To rename a folder:  
To remove a screen item:  
1. Tap the folder to open it.  
1. Press and hold the item on the screen you want to  
remove. The item then expands and the device  
vibrates. Don’ lift your finger just yet.  
2. Press and hold the folder’s title bar to open the  
Rename folder dialog box.  
3. Enter the Folder name and then tap OK.  
2. Drag the item to the  
right of the screen.  
button on the lower  
3. When the  
button turns red, release the  
item.  
39  
Personalization Settings  
2B. Settings  
Selecting a Scene  
Customize your device’s Home and extended screens’  
appearance by selecting a scene to reflect your  
lifestyle. Scenes are preset screen layouts that you can  
quickly apply.  
Press  
and tap  
> Scene, and then tap a  
scene to apply it.  
Renaming or Deleting a Scene  
You can rename or delete a custom scene.  
1. Press  
2. Select the scene you want to rename or delete.  
3. Press and:  
and tap  
> Scene.  
Tap Rename, enter the new Scene name, and then  
tap Done.  
– or –  
Tap Delete, tap the scene or scenes that you want  
to delete and then tap Delete > OK.  
40  
             
Home Screen Wallpaper  
details.  
Note: You can use *.wav, *.mid, *.mp3, *.wma, or other types  
of sound files that you have downloaded from the  
Internet or copied from your computer as ring tones.  
Notification Sound  
Default Ring Tone  
Your device provides a variety of sounds that you can  
set as the default sound for notifications.  
1. Press  
and tap  
Default notification.  
> Notification sound >   
Sound Settings  
2. Tap the sound you want to use, and then tap Apply.  
The sound plays when selected.  
Phone Ring Tone  
Select a default ring tone for incoming calls.  
Sound Set  
Selecting the Default Ring Tone  
Sound sets are collections of ring tone, notification, and  
alarm sounds that you can use to personalize the way  
your device alerts you. You can apply a preset sound  
set or create your own.  
Your device provides a variety of ring tones that you  
can set as the default ring tone of your device.  
1. Press  
and tap  
> Ringtone.  
2. Tap the ring tone you want to use, and then tap  
Apply. The ring tone briefly plays when selected.  
41  
               
Applying a Sound Set  
Adjusting the Device’s Volume Settings  
1. Press  
and tap  
Sound Set.  
> Notification sound >   
Adjust your device’s volume settings to suit your needs  
and your environment.  
2. Tap the sound set you want to use.  
1. Press  
>
and tap Settings > Sound.  
3. You can tap  
to hear samples of the ring tone,  
notification sounds, and alarm for that sound set.  
2. Tap Volume.  
3. Drag the volume sliders on the screen to adjust the  
ringtone, media, alarm, or notification volume and  
then tap OK.  
4. Tap Apply.  
Tip: To download more sound sets, tap  
>
>   
Sound set > Get more.  
Note: You can adjust the ringer volume in standby mode (or  
the earpiece volume during a call) by pressing the  
volume up or down button.  
Creating a Sound Set  
1. Press  
and tap  
Sound set > New sound set.  
> Notification sound >  
2. Enter a new sound set name, and then tap Done.  
3. To customize your newly created sound set,  
press  
and tap  
, and then select your  
preferred ring tone, notification sound, and alarm.  
Note: Be sure to choose the sound set you want before you  
change the ring tone, notification sounds, and alarm  
since your device automatically saves your changes to  
the currently selected sound set.  
42  
       
Vibrate  
Silence All  
To set your device to vibrate instead of making any  
sounds:  
The Silence All option allows you to mute all sounds  
without turning your device off.  
To activate Silence All:  
Press the volume down button in standby mode  
until you see the image below on the screen.  
Press the volume down button in standby mode  
until you see the image below on the screen.  
The device vibrates and the vibrate mode icon (  
appears on the status bar.  
)
The Silence All mode icon (  
bar.  
) appears on the status  
To set your device to always vibrate in addition to any  
ringer settings:  
To deactivate Silence All:  
1. Press  
2. Select the Vibrate check box.  
3. Press  
>
and tap Settings > Sound.  
Press the volume up button repeatedly to select a  
volume level.  
.
43  
   
Alert Notification  
Display Settings  
Set your device to alert you with an audible tone when  
you are not within the Sprint coverage area or when  
you make an emergency call.  
Changing the Screen Timeout Period  
After a period of inactivity, the device screen turns off to  
conserve battery power. You can set the idle time  
before the screen turns off.  
1. Press  
2. Tap Emergency tone, and then tap Alert.  
3. Press  
>
and tap Settings > Sound.  
1. Press  
>
and tap Settings > Display >   
.
Screen timeout.  
Enabling Touch Tones  
2. Tap the time before the screen turns off.  
You can set the device to play a sound when you are  
using the phone keypad or tapping the screen.  
Note: Extended screen timeout periods reduce the battery’s  
talk and standby times.  
1. Press  
>
and tap Settings > Sound.  
Tip: To turn off and lock the screen quickly, press  
.
2. Do any or all of the following:  
Select the Audible selection check box to set the  
device to play a sound every time you tap the  
screen.  
Tap Audible touch tones, and then tap Long tones  
or Short tones to set the device to play a sound  
when you are using the phone keypad.  
3. Press  
.
44  
           
Changing the Display Screen  
Adjusting the Brightness  
Changing the device’s display screen wallpaper with a  
preset wallpaper or your favorite photo is a quick and  
easy way to change the feel of your device and give it a  
fresh look. Browse the collection of wallpapers  
included in your device or choose from photos that you  
have taken with the camera. You can also change to an  
animated wallpaper.  
By default, the screen brightness automatically adjusts  
depending on the surrounding lighting conditions.  
To manually adjust screen brightness:  
1. Press  
>
and tap Settings > Display.  
2. Tap Brightness and then clear the Automatic  
brightness check box.  
1. Press  
>
and tap and tap Wallpaper.  
3. Drag the slider to adjust the brightness.  
2. Do one of the following:  
Tap HTC wallpapers to use a preset image.  
4. Tap OK.  
Changing the Screen Orientation  
By default, the screen orientation automatically  
changes when the device is rotated. To disable  
automatic screen orientation:  
Tap Live wallpapers to choose from preset  
animated wallpapers.  
Tap Gallery to use a picture that you have  
captured using the camera or copied to your  
device as a wallpaper. You can crop the picture  
before setting it as a wallpaper.  
1. Press  
2. Clear the Auto-rotate screen check box and   
press  
>
and tap Settings > Display.  
3. Tap Save or Set wallpaper.  
.
45  
       
Location Settings  
Note: Not all application screens support automatic rotation.  
The screen orientation automatically changes to  
landscape mode when you turn the device sideways.  
Your device is equipped with a Location feature for use  
in connection with location-based services.  
The Location feature allows the network to detect your  
position. Turning Location off will hide your location  
from everyone except 911.  
Recalibrating the Screen  
Recalibrate the screen if you feel that the screen  
orientation does not respond properly to the way you  
hold the device.  
Note: Turning Location on will allow the network to detect  
your position using GPS technology, making some  
Sprint applications and services easier to use. Turning  
Location off will disable the GPS location function for  
all purposes except 911, but will not hide your general  
location based on the cell site serving your call. No  
application or service may use your location without  
your request or permission. GPS-enhanced 911 is not  
available in all areas.  
1. Press  
>
and tap Settings > Display >   
G-Sensor calibration.  
2. Place the device on a flat surface and then tap  
Calibrate.  
3. After the recalibration process, tap OK.  
To enable your device’s Location setting feature:  
1. Press  
>
and tap Settings > Location >  
Location setting.  
2. Read the Location disclaimer and then tap ON.  
3. Press  
.
46  
     
When you turn the Location setting feature on, the  
device displays the icon on the status bar. When  
you turn Location setting off, the device displays   
the icon.  
To display a notification and vibrate the device when you  
receive a message:  
1. Press  
and then tap  
> Messages.  
2. Press  
and then tap Settings > Notifications.  
Messaging Settings  
3. In the Received messages section, select the Play  
notification sound and Vibrate check boxes.  
Your device’s advanced messaging capabilities let you  
send and receive many different kinds of text  
messages without placing a voice call. (For more  
Note: Tap Notification sound to choose a notification sound.  
4. Press  
.
To make the front indicator light (LED) flash when you  
receive a message:  
Messaging settings allow you to decide how you would  
like to be notified of new messages and create your  
own preset messages.  
1. Press  
>
and tap Settings > Display >  
Notification flash.  
2. Select the SMS/MMS check box and then   
press  
Setting Message Notification  
.
When you receive a message, your device notifies you  
by displaying an icon on your display screen. You can  
also choose to vibrate the device and have the screen  
flash when you receive a message.  
47  
     
To add a new preset message:  
Managing Preset Messages  
1. Press  
2. Press  
3. Press  
and then tap  
> Messages.  
Your device is loaded with several preset messages to  
help make sending text messages easier. Customize or  
delete these messages, such as “Where are you?,”  
“Let’s catch up soon,” and “Just checking in” to suit  
your needs, or add your own messages to the list.  
, tap Compose and tap the “Add text” box.  
and tap Quick text. (You will see the list of  
preset messages.)  
4. Press  
and tap Insert.  
To edit or delete a preset message:  
5. Enter your message and tap OK. (Your new  
message will be added to the beginning of the list.)  
1. Press  
2. Press  
3. Press  
and then tap  
> Messages.  
, tap Compose and tap the “Add text” box.  
and tap Quick text. (You will see the list of  
preset messages.)  
4. Press  
and:  
Tap Edit, tap the message you want to edit, edit the  
message and tap OK.  
– or –  
Tap Delete, select the message you want to delete,  
and tap Delete > OK. (Tap Cancel to cancel the  
deletion.)  
48  
     
Airplane Mode  
TTY Use With Sprint Service  
Airplane Mode allows you to use many of your device’s  
features, such as Gallery, Camera, and Music, when  
you are on an airplane or in any other area where  
making or receiving calls or data is prohibited. When  
you set your device to Airplane Mode, it cannot send or  
receive any calls or access online information.  
A TTY (teletypewriter, also known as a TDD or Text  
Telephone) is a telecommunications device that allows  
people who are deaf, hard of hearing, or who have  
speech or language disabilities, to communicate by  
telephone.  
Your device is compatible with select TTY devices.  
Please check with the manufacturer of your TTY device  
to ensure that it supports digital wireless transmission.  
Your device and TTY device will connect using a  
special cable that plugs into your device’s headset  
jack. If this cable was not provided with your TTY  
device, contact your TTY device manufacturer to  
purchase the connector cable.  
To quickly turn Airplane Mode on or off:  
Press and hold  
Mode in Power options. While in Airplane Mode,  
the status bar will display  
, and then tap Airplane  
.
To turn Airplane Mode on or off in Settings:  
1. Press and tap Settings > Wireless &  
networks.  
>
When establishing your Sprint service, please call  
Sprint Customer Service using the state  
Telecommunications Relay Service (TRS) by first  
2. Select the Airplane mode check box and press  
.  
While in Airplane Mode, the status bar will   
dialing  
. Then provide  
display  
.
the state TRS with this number: 866-727-4889.  
49  
       
To turn TTY Mode on or off:  
1. Press and tap Settings > Call > TTY mode.  
Security Settings  
>
2. Tap TTY Full, TTY HCO, or TTY VCO to turn TTY  
Protecting Your Device with a Screen Lock  
mode on.  
You can increase the security of your device by  
creating a screen lock. When enabled, you have to  
draw the correct unlock pattern on the screen, enter the  
correct PIN, or enter the correct password to unlock the  
device’s control keys, buttons, and touchscreen.  
– or –  
Tap TTY Off to turn TTY mode off.  
Note: When enabled, TTY mode may impair the audio  
quality of non-TTY devices connected to the headset  
jack.  
To create and enable the screen unlock pattern:  
1. Press  
>
and tap Settings > Security >   
WARNING: 911 Emergency Calling  
Sprint recommends that TTY users make  
emergency calls by other means, including  
Telecommunications Relay Services (TRS),  
analog cellular, and landline communications.  
Wireless TTY calls to 911 may be corrupted  
when received by public safety answering points  
(PSAPs), rendering some communications  
unintelligible. The problem encountered appears  
related to TTY equipment or software used by  
PSAPs. This matter has been brought to the  
attention of the FCC, and the wireless industry  
and the PSAP community are currently working  
to resolve this.  
Set up screen lock.  
2. Tap Pattern.  
3. Read the information on the screen and tap Next.  
4. Study the example pattern on the screen, and then  
tap Next.  
5. Draw the screen unlock pattern by connecting at  
least four dots in a vertical, horizontal, or diagonal  
direction. Lift your finger from the screen when  
finished.  
50  
           
4. Enter your PIN again to confirm and then tap OK.  
Note: You must slide your finger on the screen to create the  
If you fail to enter the correct PIN after five attempts, you  
will be prompted to wait for 30 seconds before you can  
try again.  
pattern and not tap individual dots.  
6. The device records the pattern. Tap Continue.  
7. When prompted, draw the screen unlock pattern  
To create and enable a screen unlock password:  
again, and then tap Confirm.  
1. Press  
>
and tap Settings > Security >   
Tip: Clear the Use visible pattern check box if you do not  
want the unlock pattern to display on the screen when  
you unlock it.  
Set up screen lock.  
2. Tap Password.  
3. Enter a password, tap Continue, and then enter  
your password again to confirm it.  
Note: To change your unlock screen pattern, press  
>
,
and then tap Settings > Security > Change screen  
lock. Draw the current unlock screen pattern, and then  
tap Pattern. Follow screen instructions to change your  
unlock screen pattern.  
If you fail to enter the correct password after five  
attempts, you will be prompted to wait for 30 seconds  
before you can try again.  
If you fail to draw the correct unlock pattern on the  
screen after five attempts, you will be prompted to wait  
for 30 seconds before you can try again.  
To disable the screen lock:  
1. Press  
>
and tap Settings > Security >   
Change screen lock.  
To create and enable a screen unlock PIN:  
2. Draw your unlock screen pattern, enter your PIN, or  
enter your password, and then tap Continue.  
If you fail to enter the correct password after five  
attempts, you will be prompted to wait for 30  
seconds before you can try again.  
1. Press  
Set up screen lock.  
2. Tap PIN.  
3. Enter a PIN and tap Continue.  
>
and tap Settings > Security >   
3. Tap None.  
51  
       
Updating Your Device’s System Software  
Resetting Your Device  
From time to time, system software updates for your  
device may be available. Your device can automatically  
check and notify you if an update is available. You can  
download and install the update to your device.  
Depending on the type of update, the update may  
erase all your personal data and customized settings,  
and it could also remove any programs you have  
installed. Make sure that you have backed up the  
information and files you want to keep.  
Resetting the device deletes all data, including  
downloaded applications, and resets the device back  
to its initial state — the state before you turned on the  
device for the first time.  
Important: Make sure to back up important data you have  
on the device before you reset it.  
Press  
>
and tap Settings > SD & phone  
storage > Factory data reset > Reset phone.  
To reset the device using the device keys:  
Note: Checking and downloading system software updates  
may incur additional data transfer fees.  
1. With the device turned off, press and hold the  
volume button down, and then press  
.
To check for device system software updates manually  
2. When the device’s display turns on, release the  
volume button.  
1. Press  
>
and tap Settings >   
System updates > HTC software update.  
3. Use the volume button to select FACTORY RESET,  
2. On the Software updates screen, tap Check now.  
and then press  
. (All data will be deleted  
from the device.)  
52  
   
Security Features for Data Services  
Data Synchronization Settings  
Enabling and Disabling Data Services  
Synchronizing Google Apps  
You can disable data services without turning off your  
device; however, you will not have access to all data  
services, including Web and messaging. Disabling  
data services will avoid any charges associated with  
these services. While signed out, you can still place or  
receive phone calls, check voicemail, and use other  
voice services. You may enable data services again at  
any time.  
Your device’s Google Apps™, such as Gmail, Calendar,  
and Contacts, give you access to the same personal  
information (email messages, events, and contacts)  
that you add, view, and edit on your computer using  
Gmail or Google Calendar. Synchronize the Google  
Apps you want to keep information up-to-date.  
Note: You need to be signed in to your Google account to  
synchronize Google Apps.  
To enable or disable data services:  
1. Press  
>
and tap Settings >   
To select which Google Apps to synchronize:  
Wireless & networks.  
1. Press  
>
and tap Settings > Accounts & sync.  
2. Select the Mobile network check box to enable  
data services.  
Tip: Select the Auto-sync check box to automatically  
synchronize all applications. When the Auto-sync check  
box is cleared, you can synchronize individual  
applications manually by selecting their respective check  
boxes.  
– or –  
Clear the Mobile network check box to disable data  
services.  
2. Tap Google.  
3. Select the Google Apps you want to synchronize.  
53  
         
To stop synchronization:  
To change the synchronization schedule:  
and tap Settings >   
When the device is synchronizing, tap Cancel sync  
1. Press  
>
to stop synchronization.  
Accounts & sync > Exchange ActiveSync >   
Update schedule.  
Synchronizing Exchange ActiveSync  
2. Set the start and end of your Peak time.  
You can synchronize your device with your company’s  
Microsoft Exchange Server to access your device’s  
Exchange Server account’s email, contacts, and  
calendar events.  
3. In Frequency, tap Peak times or Off-peak times to  
set the time interval at which the device will check  
for new data.  
To manually start synchronization:  
Note: You need to have an Exchange ActiveSync account  
On the Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync screen, tap  
set up on your device. See “Mail” on page 197.  
Sync now.  
To select which Exchange ActiveSync items to  
synchronize:  
To change account settings:  
1. Press and tap Settings >   
>
1. Press  
>
and tap Settings >   
Accounts & sync > Exchange ActiveSync >   
Accounts & sync > Exchange ActiveSync.  
General settings.  
2. Select the Exchange ActiveSync items you want to  
synchronize.  
2. Change the general settings, mail, and calendar  
settings according to your preference.  
3. Press  
.
54  
   
To log in to your Flickr account:  
1. Press and tap Settings > Accounts & sync.  
Social Network Settings  
>
2. Tap Add account > Flickr.  
Logging in to and Synchronizing Your  
Social Network Accounts  
3. Enter your Yahoo! ID and password and tap   
Sign In.  
If you set up a Facebook for HTC Sense, Flickr, or  
Twitter account when you first turned on your device,  
you can quickly login and synchronize information  
such as status messages and friends lists between  
your device and your social network accounts on the  
Web.  
4. Follow the screen instructions to log in to your  
Flickr account.  
To synchronize your Facebook or Twitter account:  
1. Press  
>
and tap Settings > Accounts & sync.  
2. Tap Facebook for HTC Sense or Twitter.  
3. Tap Sync now.  
Note: You need to have an existing Facebook, Flickr, or  
Twitter account.  
To remove a social network account:  
To log in to your Facebook or Twitter account:  
1. Press  
>
and tap Settings > Accounts & sync.  
1. Press  
>
and tap Settings > Accounts & sync.  
2. Tap the account you want to remove.  
2. Tap Add account.  
3. Tap Remove account.  
3. Tap Facebook for HTC Sense, Twitter, or Twitter for  
HTC Sense.  
4. Follow screen instructions to enter your user name  
and password and then tap Sign in or Log in.  
55  
                 
Clearing Application Cache and Data  
Free up storage space and device memory by deleting  
application cache and data.  
Application Settings  
Allowing Installation of Third-Party  
Programs  
By default, you can install only programs and games  
downloaded from the Android Market.  
1. Press  
>
and tap Settings > Applications >  
Manage applications.  
2. In the Manage applications list, tap the  
Downloaded, All, On SD card, or Running tab, and  
then tap the application whose cache or data you  
want to delete.  
To install third-party programs on the device:  
Press  
>
, tap Settings > Applications, and  
then select the Unknown sources check box.  
Tip: Press  
to bring up sort options.  
To uninstall third-party programs on the device:  
and tap Settings > Applications >  
3. In the Application info screen, tap Clear data or  
Clear cache.  
1. Press  
>
Manage applications.  
2. On the Manage applications screen, tap the  
Downloaded, All, On SD card, or Running tab and  
then tap the application you want to uninstall.  
3. On the Application info screen, tap Uninstall.  
Note: You cannot uninstall programs that are preinstalled on  
the device.  
56  
     
Date & Time Settings  
Power-Saving Tips  
Setting Local Date, Time Zone, and Time  
Enabling Power Saver  
By default, your device automatically uses the   
network-provided date, time zone, and time. However,  
you can set the date, time zone, and time manually if  
you need to.  
A faster and simpler way to save battery power is to  
enable the power saver feature of your device. Power  
saver manages your device’s power consumption  
automatically when it reaches a power level that you’ve  
specified. Power saver is enabled by default.  
1. Press  
>
and tap Settings > Date & time.  
1. Press  
>
and tap Settings > Power.  
2. Clear the Automatic check box.  
1. Make sure that the Enable power saver check box is  
selected.  
3. Tap Set date. In the Change date window, scroll the  
date wheel to change the date. Tap OK when finished.  
2. Tap Power saver on at and select the battery power  
level when you would want power saver to start  
managing the device’s power.  
4. Tap Select time zone, and then select the time zone in  
the list. Scroll down the list to view more time zones.  
5. Tap Set time. In the time window, scroll the time  
3. Tap Power saver settings and select the settings  
and features that you want power saver to disable  
or change when the device’s battery power runs  
low.  
wheel to adjust the time. Tap OK when finished.  
6. Select the Use 24-hour format check box to toggle  
between using a 12-hour or 24-hour time format.  
7. Tap Select date format, and then select how you  
want dates to display on your device. The selected  
date format also applies to the date displayed in  
the Alarm Clock.  
57  
               
Adjusting the Display Brightness and  
Screen On-Time  
Managing Your Device’s Wireless  
Functions  
Press  
>
, tap Settings > Display > Brightness,  
To save battery life, you can disable the 4G, Bluetooth,  
GPS, Sprint Hotspot, and Wi-Fi functions of the device  
when not in use.  
and then modify the backlight setting as desired. For  
– or –  
To change wireless settings:  
Add the Power Control widget to the home screen to  
Press  
>
and then tap Settings > Wireless &  
easily adjust the screen brightness. Press  
tap > Widget > Power Control.  
Decrease the time before the screen turns off when  
the device is idle. Press , tap Settings >  
and   
networks. Disable any wireless functions (for  
example, Bluetooth or Wi-Fi) that are not in use.  
To change GPS settings:  
Press and then tap Settings > Location.  
Disable the GPS by unchecking Use GPS satellites.  
To add a wireless function widget to your Home screen:  
Press and tap > Widget > Settings. Tap the  
>
Display > Screen timeout, and then select a timeout  
value.  
>
To turn off the screen, press  
. The device  
will continue to function.  
widget you would like to add (for example, 4G,  
Bluetooth, GPS, Sprint Hotspot, or Wi-Fi).  
58  
   
Setting the Email Synchronization  
Schedule  
If you use the device to send and receive email, you  
can set your email account to download email more or  
less frequently as desired.  
1. Press  
and tap  
> Mail.  
2. If you have set up multiple email accounts on your  
device, switch to the email account that you want  
to edit by tapping  
.
3. In the Inbox, press  
and tap More > Settings >  
Send & Receive > Update schedule.  
4. In the Frequency section, tap Peak times or   
Off-peak times, and then select an email download  
frequency.  
|
Note: The more frequently your device checks for new  
messages, the more quickly the battery will run down.  
Tip: You can also close applications that are not in use to  
conserve battery power. To do so, press  
>
, and  
then tap Settings > Applications > Manage  
applications. Tap the Running tab, tap the application  
you would like to close, and then tap Stop.  
59  
 
2. Tap the Call history tab  
.
2C. History  
Viewing History  
History is a list of phone numbers (or People entries)  
for calls you placed, accepted, or missed. History  
makes redialing a number fast and easy. It is  
continually updated as your device automatically adds  
new numbers to the beginning of the list.  
Each entry contains the phone number (if it is  
available) and People entry name (if the number is  
in People).  
3. Tap  
at the right side of a number of contact to  
To view History:  
view the call history for that number or contact.  
1. Press  
and then tap  
> People.  
60  
       
Saving a Number From History  
Note: History records only calls that occur while the device is  
turned on. If a call is received while your device is  
turned off, it will not be included in History.  
If the phone number of a person who called is not in  
People, you can choose to save the number after you  
hang up.  
Making a Call From History  
1. Press  
and then tap  
> People.  
1. Press  
and then tap  
> People.  
2. Tap the Call history tab  
.
2. Tap the Call history tab  
.
3. Press and hold the received call and then tap   
Save to People on the options menu.  
3. Tap an entry on the Call history list to place a call  
to that entry.  
4. Tap Create a new contact.  
5. The phone number is automatically added to the  
Mobile box in the Phone section. Enter the name  
and other contact information.  
Note: You cannot make calls from History to entries identified  
as No ID or Restricted.  
Tip: Press and hold an entry in the Call history list to open the  
options menu where you can select to view the contact  
information (if number is stored in People), edit the  
number before you redial, send a text message, or delete  
the entry from the Call history list and more.  
Tip: To store the number as another type (for example, home  
number), tap the Mobile button.  
6. Tap Save.  
After you have saved the number, your device displays  
the new People entry. (See “Displaying an Entry” on  
page 71.)  
Note: You cannot save phone numbers already in People or  
from calls identified as No ID or Restricted.  
61  
       
Prepending a Number From History Erasing History  
If you need to make a call from History and you are  
outside your local area code, you can add the  
appropriate prefix by prepending the number.  
To erase a History entry:  
1. Press  
and then tap  
> People.  
2. Tap the Call history tab  
.
1. Press  
and then tap  
> People.  
3. Press and hold the entry you want to delete and  
tap Delete from call history.  
2. Tap the Call history tab  
.
3. Press and hold the entry you want to call and tap  
Edit number before calling.  
To erase all History entries:  
1. Press  
2. Tap the Call history tab  
3. Press and tap Delete all.  
and then tap  
> People.  
4. Enter the prefix and tap  
number.  
to call the  
.
62  
       
About People  
In People, you can easily manage your  
2D. People  
communications with contacts through phone,  
messaging, and email. You can also view updates on  
their Facebook, Flickr, and Twitter accounts.  
If you are synchronizing contacts with your Google  
account, with your PC, or with an Exchange Server, any  
contacts stored in those accounts are displayed in  
People. You can also synchronize contacts from your  
Facebook account in People.  
Ways of Getting Contacts Into Your Device  
You can add contacts to your device from:  
Your old phone Use the Transfer app to transfer  
contacts from your old phone to your new device  
using Bluetooth. For more information, see  
Gmail contacts that are imported to your device  
after you set up a Google Account. For more  
63  
       
Phone contacts For more information, see “Adding  
5. From the device list, choose your old phone and  
then tap Next. Your new device then tries to pair  
with your old phone. You’ll see a security passkey  
on the screen.  
Exchange ActiveSync Server For more information,  
6. On your old phone, enter this passkey or simply  
confirm it.  
Contacts on your computer For more information,  
Facebook For more information, see “Your People  
7. Select the Contacts check box (and other  
supported types of data you want to import), and  
then tap Next.  
Transferring Contacts from Your Old Phone  
8. When your new HTC EVO 3D finishes importing  
data, tap Done.  
Easily transfer contacts from your old phone to your  
new device through Bluetooth. Depending on your old  
phone’s model, you may also transfer other types of  
data such as calendar events and text messages to  
your new device.  
Using the People Screen  
The People screen gives you easy access to all your  
contacts, as well as even faster access to the people  
and groups of people you contact most often.  
1. Press  
and then tap  
> Transfer.  
2. Tap Next and then choose your old phone’s name  
and model.  
To open People:  
3. On your old phone, turn Bluetooth on and set it to  
discoverable mode.  
Press  
and then tap  
> People. (You may  
need to scroll down the screen to see the icon.)  
4. On your new device, tap Next to continue. Your  
device automatically turns Bluetooth on and  
searches for Bluetooth devices.  
64  
   
The People screen has the following tabs:  
Your People List  
The All screen of People shows all your contacts,  
including Google contacts, Exchange ActiveSync  
contacts, Phone contacts, and Facebook contacts.  
1
2
3
1. All gives you access to all contacts on your device,  
online accounts, and more. You can also use this  
tab to open or update your profile. For more  
1
8
2
7
6
2. Groups lets you assign contacts to groups so you  
can easily send an SMS, MMS, or email message  
to a whole group. For more information, see  
3
4
3. Call history lists all your dialed numbers and  
received and missed calls. For more information,  
5
Note: If you signed in to your Google Account and Facebook  
account when you first set up the device, your contacts  
from those accounts will appear in the contacts list  
when you open People.  
1. Tap to filter your contacts list and display only the  
contacts from particular account types (for  
example, Google contacts or Facebook contacts).  
65  
 
2. Tap to search a contact by typing on the box or by  
tapping to search a contact by voice.  
Setting Up Your Profile  
My profile provides a convenient way to store your  
personal contact information so that you can easily  
send it to other people.  
3. Tap a contact to open the contact details for that  
contact.  
4. Tap the photo or icon to open a menu where you  
can quickly choose how to communicate with the  
contact. Depending on the contact information  
stored, you can call, send a text or email message,  
see the contact’s Facebook profile, and locate the  
contact’s address in Google Maps.  
To set up your profile:  
1. On the All screen of the People application, tap Me.  
Tip: If you are logged in to your Facebook account through  
Facebook for HTC Sense, instead of Me, you’ll see your  
Facebook name. Tap your name, press  
and then tap  
Edit.  
5. Appears when a contact has sent you something  
such as new email messages, posted live feeds, or  
when it’s the contact’s birthday.  
2. Enter your name and contact details.  
3. Tap Save.  
6. The Facebook status or upcoming Facebook event  
appears when you link the contact to their  
Facebook account.  
7. Check out who’s online in Google Talk™. Online  
status icons are displayed if you’re signed in to  
Google Talk on your device. For example,   
means the contact is available to chat.  
8. Tap to set up, edit, or send your profile. For more  
information, see “Setting Up Your Profile.”  
66  
   
Adding a New People Entry  
Saving a Phone Number  
1. On the All screen, press  
and tap Add contact.  
To save a number from standby mode:  
Note: If you have set up a Google Account or an Exchange  
ActiveSync email account, the Contact type option  
appears to determine which account the contact will  
sync with.  
1. Press  
and tap  
.
2. Enter the phone number by tapping the keys on  
the keypad.  
3. Tap Save to People. (This button appears after  
tapping six digits.)  
2. Tap the Name box, enter the first and last name of  
the contact and tap OK.  
4. Tap Create new contact or Save to existing contact.  
5. Enter the new contact name and tap Save.  
– or –  
3. Enter the contact information in the boxes  
provided. Press  
if you want to close the  
onscreen keyboard and view other contact  
information.  
Tap an existing contact name and tap Save.  
4. Tap Save.  
Tip: ICE - In Case of Emergency  
To make it easier for emergency personnel to identify  
important contacts, you can list your local emergency  
contacts under “ICE” in your device’s People list. For  
example, if your mother is your primary emergency  
contact, list her as “ICE-Mom” in your Contacts. To list  
more than one emergency contact, use “ICE1-___,”  
“ICE2-___,” etc.  
67  
     
For more information about messages, see “Text  
Using the Details Screen  
When you tap a contact on the People screen, the  
Details screen opens, showing you the information  
stored for that contact, exchanged messages and  
phone calls with that contact, Facebook notifications,  
and more.  
3. Mail shows all email messages you have received  
from the contact. Tap an email message to view it.  
4. Updates and events shows the contact’s updates  
and events from social network accounts you've  
linked like Facebook, Twitter, and Flickr.  
The Details screen has the following tabs:  
5. Gallery shows the linked contact’s Facebook and  
Flickr albums and photos. For more information,  
1
2
3
4
5
6
1. Details shows the information you have stored for  
the contact, and allows you to get in touch with the  
contact directly by tapping any of the displayed  
methods. For example, if the contact has a stored  
work phone number, tap Call Work to call that  
number. You can also add one of the contact’s  
phone numbers as a speed dial number. For more  
6. Call history lists all your incoming, outgoing, and  
missed calls to and from the contact. Tap a listed  
number to call the contact.  
2. Messages shows your exchanged SMS messages  
with the contact. You can reply to the contact’s  
message directly from this tab.   
68  
   
Merging Entries in People  
If you have the same contacts on your device, Google  
Account, and social network accounts such as  
Facebook and Twitter, your device will try to combine  
them automatically or let you decide which contacts to  
combine. Combining the same contacts avoids  
duplicated entries in your contacts list.  
Accepting Matched Contacts Suggestions  
When your device finds contacts that can be merged,  
you’ll see a link icon (  
the status bar.  
) in the notifications area of  
1. Slide the Notifications panel down, and then tap  
Matched contacts suggestion. Your device displays  
all suggested contacts that you can merge.  
2. To merge, tap  
.
3. Tap OK.  
Note: If you don’t want to merge any of your contacts, tap  
Dismiss all.  
69  
 
Manually Merging Entries in People  
Viewing a List of All Your Linked Entries  
1. Press  
and then tap  
> People.  
1. Press  
and then tap  
> People.  
2. On the All screen, tap the entry (not the icon or  
photo) you want to merge with another entry on  
your device.  
2. On the All screen, press  
and tap More > Linked  
contacts. The All linked contacts screen then  
opens where you can see the account types and  
information merged.  
3. On the upper right corner of the screen, tap  
or  
(if there are suggested links.)  
3. You can choose to break the link of an account  
type or relink.  
4. On the screen, you can:  
4. When you’re done, tap OK.  
On the Suggested links section, tap  
to link the  
entry to the selected account.  
Breaking Linked Entries  
On the Add contact section, tap one of the options  
to link to another contact.  
1. Press  
and then tap  
> People.  
5. Tap Done.  
2. On the All screen, tap the entry (not the icon or  
photo) whose contact information link you want to  
break.  
3. On the upper right corner of the screen, tap  
.
4. On the Linked contacts section, tap  
entry to break the link.  
beside the  
5. Tap Done.  
70  
Editing the Phone Number of an Entry  
1. Display an entry in People. (See “Displaying an  
Entry” for details.)  
Editing an Entry in People  
Displaying an Entry  
2. Scroll down the screen and tap Edit.  
Press  
and then tap  
> People, and then tap  
an entry.  
3. On the Phone section, tap the number you want to  
edit.  
Note: You cannot edit the contact information of a Facebook  
friend.  
4. Edit the number using the keypad.  
Tips: Tap the Number type (for example,  
Tap X at the right side of a number to delete it.  
5. Tap Save.  
) to change it.  
Adding a Number to an Entry  
1. Display an entry in People. (See “Displaying an  
Entry” for details.)  
2. Scroll down the screen and tap Edit.  
Selecting a Ringer Type for an Entry  
Assign a ringer type to an entry in People so you can  
identify the caller by the ringer type. See “Sound  
3. On the Phone section tap Add.  
4. Tap the type of phone number you want to add.  
(For example, Home or Work.)  
5. Enter the phone number and tap Save.  
1. Display an entry in People. (See “Displaying an  
Entry” on page 71 for details.)  
2. Scroll down the screen, and then tap Ringtone.  
71  
           
3. Select a ring tone (the ring tone plays back) from  
Adding an Email Address to an Entry  
1. Display an entry in People. (See “Displaying an  
Entry” for details.)  
the menu and tap OK.  
Assigning a Picture to an Entry  
2. Scroll down the screen and tap Edit.  
3. On the Email section, tap Add.  
Assign a picture to a contact entry to display it when  
that contact calls you.  
1. Display an entry in People. (See “Displaying an  
Entry” for details.)  
4. Enter the email address and tap Save.  
Sending Contact Information as a vCard  
2. Scroll down the screen and tap Edit.  
1. Press  
and then tap  
> People.  
3. Tap  
at the top-left corner of the screen.  
2. On the All screen, do the following:  
4. Tap Gallery or Camera.  
To send a contact’s information, press and hold  
the name of the contact (not the icon or photo)  
and then tap Send contact as vCard.  
If you selected Gallery, select an album to find the  
picture, tap the picture you want to use, crop the  
picture, and tap Save.  
To send your contact information, press and hold  
[Your name] My profile and then tap Send my  
profile.  
If you selected Camera, the camera will launch  
and you will use it to take a new picture.   
3. Tap the box under the contact name or your name,  
to select how you want to send it.  
5. Tap Save.  
4. Select the type of information you want to send,  
and then tap Send.  
72  
 
5. Enter the recipient’s number or email address, and  
Deleting an Entry  
then tap Send.  
1. Press  
2. Tap a contact you wish to delete.  
3. Press and then tap Delete.  
and then tap  
> People.  
You can also send the vCard using Bluetooth. To learn  
how to send files through Bluetooth, see “Using  
4. Tap OK to confirm the deletion.  
Sending an Entry as a vCard  
Easily share your own contact information or any  
contact on your device.  
Deleting Multiple Entries  
1. Press  
and then tap  
> People.  
1. Press  
and then tap  
> People.  
2. On the All screen,  
and then tap Delete.  
2. On the All screen, do the following:  
3. Select the entries you want to delete, and then tap  
Delete.  
To send a contact’s information, press and hold  
the name of the contact (not the icon or photo)  
whose contact information you want to send, and  
then tap Send contact as vCard.  
4. Tap OK to confirm the deletions.  
To send your contact information, tap [Your name]  
My profile, tap Share my contact card, and then  
choose how you want to send it.  
3. Select the type of information you want to send,  
and then tap Send.  
73  
4. To display an entry within the group, tap the entry.  
Finding Entries in People  
5. To dial the entry’s default phone number (Primary),  
tap the number under Action.  
Finding Contacts by Name  
details.  
1. Press  
and then tap  
> People.  
2. Scroll through all the entries.  
– or –  
Backing Up and Importing Entries in  
People  
Scroll up to the beginning of the contacts list and  
then tap the box with the word “Search people.”  
Enter the first letter or letters of a name (such as  
“dav” for “Dave”). (The more letters you enter, the  
more your search narrows.)  
Backing Up People Entries to the Storage  
Card  
3. Tap an entry to display it.  
1. Press  
and then tap  
> People.  
4. To dial the entry’s default phone number (Primary),  
tap the number under Action.  
2. Press  
SD card.  
, and then tap Import/Export > Export to  
Finding Group Entries  
3. When asked to confirm, tap OK.  
1. Press  
and then tap  
> People.  
2. Scroll to the Groups tab.  
3. Scroll through the group titles. To display entries  
belonging to a group, tap the group name.  
74  
           
Importing Entries From the Storage Card  
Working with Groups  
You can import only those contacts that were exported  
to the storage card using the Export to SD card feature  
On the Groups tab, you can assign contacts to groups  
so you can easily send text, multimedia, or email  
messages to a whole group. You can also sync your  
device’s groups with the groups in your Google  
account, accessible using your computer’s Web  
browser. By default, the Frequent group automatically  
stores the contacts you dial or get calls from the most.  
1. Press  
and then tap  
> People.  
2. Press  
SD card.  
, and then tap Import/Export > Import from  
3. If you have Google or Exchange ActiveSync  
accounts set up on your device, tap the type for  
the imported contacts.  
Creating a Group and Adding Entries  
1. Press  
and then tap  
> People > Groups tab.  
2. Press  
and tap Add group.  
Tip: Press  
to stop the import process.  
3. Enter a name for the group and tap Add contact to  
group.  
4. Select the entries you want in the group. You can  
use the search bar to search for entries quickly or  
press  
to hide the onscreen keyboard and scroll  
through the list.  
5. Tap Save. (Tap  
to close the keyboard if you do  
not see the Save button.)  
75  
     
6. Tap  
to select a photo for the group. close the  
keyboard if you do not see the Save button.)  
Sending a Text or Multimedia Message to  
a Group  
7. Tap Save.  
1. Press  
and then tap  
> People > Groups tab.  
Editing a Contact Group  
2. Tap the group you want to send a message to.  
1. Press  
and then tap  
> People > Groups tab.  
3. Go to the Group action tab (  
Send group message.  
), and then tap  
2. Press and hold a group and tap Edit group.  
Note: Depending on your account, you may be charged per  
group member for each message sent. For example, if  
you send a message to a group of five people, you will  
be charged for five messages.  
3. You can:  
Tap the group name to change the name. You  
can only change the name for groups that you  
have created.  
For instructions on composing and sending your  
Tap the icon to the left of the group name to  
change or remove the group photo.  
To add entries to the group, tap Add contact to  
group and tap the entries you want to add and  
tap Save.  
Sending an Email Message to a Group  
1. Press  
and then tap  
> People > Groups tab.  
To remove entries from the group, tap  
at the  
2. Tap the group you want to send the email  
message to.  
right side of the entry you want to remove.  
4. Tap Save. (Tap  
to close the keyboard if you do  
not see the Save button.)  
3. Go to the Group action tab (  
Send group mail.  
), and then tap  
76  
4. Tap Gmail to use Gmail to send the email  
message. (You need to be signed in to your  
Google account to use Gmail.)  
Rearranging Members in a Contact Group  
1. Press  
2. Tap the group to view its members.  
3. Press and tap Rearrange.  
4. Press and hold at the end of the contact name  
and then tap  
> People > Groups tab.  
– or –  
Tap Mail to use your Exchange ActiveSync or  
POP3/IMAP email account to send the email  
message. (You need to have an email account set  
up on your device.)  
you want to move. When the row is highlighted,  
drag it to its new position.  
For instructions on composing and sending your  
5. Tap Save.  
Deleting a Group  
Rearranging Your Contact Groups  
Note: You can only delete groups that you’ve created.  
1. Press  
and then tap  
and tap Rearrange.  
at the end of the group you  
> People > Groups tab.  
1. Press  
and then tap  
> People > Groups tab.  
2. Press  
2. Press and hold a group and tap Delete group.  
3. Press and hold  
want to move. When the row is highlighted, drag it  
to its new position.  
4. Tap Save.  
77  
Setting the Default Communication  
Method  
Using People Widgets  
Stay in touch with different circles of friends or  
colleagues in your life. Using the People widget, you  
can instantly place a call, send a message, view details  
of a favorite contact, and even check Facebook and  
Twitter updates. You can add several People widgets  
on the Home screen, with a different group of contacts  
on each widget.  
1. Press  
and go to the People widget.  
2. Tap a contact on the widget.  
3. On the Select default action screen, tap the  
communication method you want for the contact.  
Changing the Default Communication  
Method  
Adding the People Widget  
1. Press  
and tap  
> Widget > People.  
1. Press  
and go to the People widget.  
2. Choose the widget style, and then tap Select.  
2. Tap the name of a contact on the widget to open  
the person’s contact card.  
3. Select the group you want to add to the widget.  
3. Press  
, and then tap Set default action.  
4. Drag the widget to a blank Home screen, and then  
release.  
4. On the Select default action screen, tap the  
communication method you want for the contact.  
5. Repeat the steps to add another People widget.  
Tip: The People widget requires a whole screen.  
78  
     
Getting In Touch With a Contact  
Connecting with Your Social  
Networks  
1. Press  
and go to the People widget.  
2. You can:  
Facebook for HTC Sense  
Tap a contact photo or icon to perform the default  
communication method you’ve selected. For  
example, if you’ve set it to call the contact’s work  
number, then the device will open Phone and dial  
that number.  
View your Facebook updates in supported applications  
how to sign in to Facebook for HTC Sense.  
– or –  
After signing in to Facebook for HTC Sense, you can:  
Tap the name of the contact to open the contact  
details screen. On the contact details screen,  
choose how you want to communicate with the  
contact by tapping an option under Action.  
See all your Facebook contacts and their instant  
status updates in People.  
When you tap a contact on the All screen, slide to the  
Updates and events tab to see updates such as  
posted status messages, uploads, and profile  
changes.  
79  
     
You can also upload one or more photos from your  
microSD card to Facebook, and then tag and add  
captions that go with it.  
When you’re viewing the albums of a Facebook  
friend, you can also share a link to a particular  
album, or comment on the album photos.  
Check your friends’ Facebook status updates in  
84 for details.)  
Add your Facebook events and your friends’  
birthdays to the Calendar application.  
Updating Your Facebook Status  
1. Press  
and then tap  
> People > All screen.  
2. Tap [Your Name] My profile > Facebook.  
Updates and events tab  
of a Facebook contact  
Gallery tab of a  
Facebook contact  
3. Enter your status in the “What’s on your mind” text  
box and tap Share.  
When there is a notification of the contact’s birthday,  
you can tap the notification to send a greeting.  
Synchronizing Facebook for HTC Sense  
Browse through Facebook photo albums in Gallery.  
page 141 for details.)  
80  
Changing Facebook for HTC Sense Update  
Settings  
Tweeting on Your Device using Peep  
You can post and read tweets, send and receive direct  
messages, search for new Twitter users to follow using  
the Peep app. Peep is a Twitter client that lets you enjoy  
“tweeting” on your device. You can also link your  
contacts in People to their Twitter profiles (if you’re  
following them).  
1. Press  
>
and tap Settings > Accounts & sync.  
2. Tap Facebook for HTC Sense.  
3. Tap Update schedule, and then select the time  
interval.  
If you did not sign in to your Twitter account when you  
first turned on the device, you can do one of the  
following:  
Sign in to your Twitter account from Peep. From  
the Home screen, tap  
> Peep, and then follow  
the onscreen instructions.  
Add the Twitter for HTC Sense account in   
Settings > Accounts & sync.  
Note: Twitter for HTC Sense and Peep share the same login  
credentials. This means that when you use Peep on  
your device for tweeting, you can also link your  
contacts to their Twitter profiles via Twitter for HTC  
Sense.  
81  
   
2. Tap a person’s name to check profile details and  
Using Peep  
all of his or her tweets.  
Press  
and then tap  
> Peep. (You may need  
3. If you have linked the contact in People, tap the  
photo or icon to open a menu where you can  
quickly choose how to communicate with the  
contact.  
to scroll down the screen to see the icon.) Peep  
opens in the All tweets tab. Slide your finger on the  
bottom row to go to the tab you want.  
4. Shows all the tweets from people you follow and  
tweets that you have sent out.  
1
2
5. Shows all tweets that mentions your user name  
using the “@[your username]” convention.  
6. Shows all private and direct messages that you  
have received or sent out.  
3
7. Shows tweets that were marked as favorites.  
8
8. Press and hold a tweet to open an options menu  
to reply, send a direct message, retweet, and more.  
Sending a Tweet  
1. On the All tweets tab, tap the “What’s happening?”  
text box.  
2. Enter your tweet.  
4
5
6
7
1. Tap to compose and send a tweet.  
82  
3. Add a picture or location to your tweet:  
Tap to post a picture from Camera or Gallery  
to your default photo hosting site and add the link  
to the picture in your tweet.  
Tap to insert your location into the tweet.  
4. Tap Post.  
Note: On the Peep screen, press  
To stop following a Twitter user:  
1. On the All Tweets tab, tap the name of the Twitter  
user you want to stop following.  
2. Press  
and tap Unfollow.  
Sending a Direct Message  
You can only send a direct message to someone who  
is following you.  
and tap More >  
Settings > Services to check or change your photo  
hosting site, location options, and URL shortening host.  
1. In any of the tabs in Peep, press  
and tap   
New message.  
Searching and Following a Twitter User  
2. Tap the text box at the top of the screen, and then  
enter the name. As you enter characters, the  
names of the Twitter users that match the  
characters you enter will appear. Tap the name  
when you see it.  
1. In any of the tabs in Peep, press  
2. Type a Twitter name in the search box. Narrow  
down your search by tapping > Users.  
3. Tap  
.
.
3. Enter your message, and then tap Post.  
4. In the list of search results, tap the Twitter user you  
You can also send a direct message when you press  
and hold a tweet of the person you want to send the  
direct message to, and then tap Send direct message  
on the options menu.  
want to follow.  
5. Press  
and tap Follow.  
83  
Setting Peep Options  
Using Friend Stream  
In any of the tabs in Peep, press  
More > Settings. You can set these options:  
, and then tap   
Friend Stream connects you to your social networks.  
Share and get updates from friends in popular  
networks like Facebook and Twitter in a single feed.  
With Friend Stream, you can easily track your friends’  
status messages, photo uploads, notifications, and  
more — or comment and post your own.  
Account settings: Sign out of your Twitter account.  
General settings: Choose whether to show the  
screen name or the real name of the people you  
follow.  
Send & receive: Set the frequency to check for new  
tweets and set the number of tweets to download.  
Note: You must be signed in to at least one social network  
account to use Friend Stream.  
Services: Set your photo hosting site, photo  
quality, location options, and URL shortening host.  
To use your Facebook account on Friend Stream, you  
need to be signed in via Facebook for HTC Sense.  
Notification settings: Select when and how you  
want to be notified.  
Opening Friend Stream  
Press  
and tap  
> Friend Stream. Friend  
Adding the Twitter Widget  
Stream opens in the All updates tab. Slide your  
Add the Twitter widget to let you send and follow your  
tweets right on the Home screen.  
finger on the bottom row to go to the tab you want.  
1. Press  
and tap  
> Widget > Twitter [HTC].  
2. Choose the widget style, and then tap Select.  
3. Drag the widget to a blank space on a screen, and  
then release.  
84  
       
2. When you tap someone’s status update, you can:  
View all tweets.  
Write a comment.  
Like or unlike someone’s Facebook posts.  
Look at someone’s album photos.  
1
2
3. Slide to the other tabs to view social network  
updates grouped as status updates only, photo  
uploads, links, updates from members of your  
Facebook list, or social network notifications.  
Updating Your Status  
You can update your status on one or on all social  
network accounts you are signed in to.  
1. Press  
and tap  
> Friend Stream.  
3
2. On the All Updates tab, tap the “What’s on your  
mind?” box.  
1. When you tap someone’s photo or name, you can:  
Check the person’s profile details.  
3. Enter your status update.  
Look at the person’s Facebook wall.  
Check the person’s posted tweets.  
4. If you want to post your update to a specific social  
network account, tap  
, uncheck the accounts  
you want to exclude and tap Done.  
85  
Adding the Friend Stream Widget  
Note: Only the accounts that you are signed in to will be  
shown on the dialog box.  
1. Press  
and tap  
> Friend Stream.  
5. Tap and then choose what you want to attach to  
your tweet or status update:  
2. On the All Updates tab, tap someone’s status  
update, and do any of the following:  
Picture Select From Camera to take a photo and  
attach it or From Gallery to attach a photo from  
your storage card.  
Tap a photo or the album name shown in the  
status update to view and comment on the album  
photos using the Gallery app.  
Location Add your current location or a location  
you pick on a map.  
Tap Like or Unlike to like or unlike the person’s  
status update.  
App recommendation Choose an app you’ve  
installed from Android Market that you want to  
share with others. The URL from which the app  
can be downloaded will be inserted to your  
status.  
Tap the text box that says Write a comment, and  
then enter what you think about the person’s  
status update.  
Checking Notifications From Your Social  
Networks  
6. Tap Post.  
1. Press  
and tap  
> Friend Stream.  
2. Slide to the Notifications tab to easily see a single  
feed of your notifications from different social  
networks. It can be a comment on your Facebook  
post, a mention or direct message in Twitter, a  
tagged photo of you, and more.  
86  
Adding the Friend Stream Widget  
Use the Friend Stream widget so you can easily update  
your status and view other people’s status updates  
right on the Home screen. If you want to keep up with  
just one person's Facebook updates, you can add the  
Friend Channel widget. You can find it in the Friend  
Stream widget layout options.  
1. Press  
and tap  
> Friend Stream.  
2. Select the widget style, and then tap Select.  
3. Drag the widget to a blank space on a screen, and  
then release.  
87  
Calendar  
2E. Calendar & Tools  
Never miss an important date again. Use the Calendar  
app to schedule your events, meetings, and  
appointments. You can set up your device to stay in  
sync with the following types of calendars:  
On your device, sign in to your Google Account so  
you’ll be able to sync the Calendar app with your  
Google Calendar online. You can add multiple  
Google Accounts.  
If you’re using Microsoft Outlook® on your computer,  
you can set up HTC Sync on your computer to sync  
Outlook Calendar with the Calendar app.  
If you have a Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync  
account and you have added it on your device, you  
can sync the Calendar app with your Exchange  
ActiveSync calendar events.  
If you’ve signed in to your social network accounts  
such as Facebook, birthdays and events of friends will  
appear in Calendar.  
88  
       
Select your Exchange ActiveSync account to  
create an Exchange ActiveSync calendar event.  
Creating an Event  
You can create events that sync with your Google  
Calendar, your computer’s Outlook Calendar, or  
Exchange ActiveSync calendar, as well as events that  
appear on your device only.  
Select Facebook to create a Facebook event that  
synchronizes with your Facebook account.  
4. Enter a name for the event.  
5. To specify the date and time of the event, do one of  
1. Press  
and tap  
> Calendar.  
the following:  
2. On any Calendar view, tap  
.
If there is a time frame for the event, tap the From  
and To date and time to set them.  
Note: To quickly create an event in monthly, weekly, or daily  
Calendar view, press and hold an empty time slot or  
date and tap New event.  
If it is a special occasion such as a birthday or an  
all-day event, set the From and To date, and then  
select the All Day check box.  
3. If you have more than one calendar, select a  
calendar in which to add the event by tapping the  
6. Enter the event location and description.  
Calendar menu arrow (  
) at the top of the  
screen and selecting any of the following  
calendars:  
7. Set the reminder time.  
Note: You can add another reminder time in a Google  
Select your Google Account to create a Google  
Calendar event. If you have several Google  
calendars on the Web, select one in which to add  
your event.  
Calendar event. Press  
to add another reminder.  
and then tap Add reminder  
8. If the event occurs on a regular basis, tap the  
Repetition box and then choose how often the  
event occurs.  
Select PC Sync to create calendar events on your  
device. You can sync them with your computer’s  
Outlook Calendar using HTC Sync.  
9. Tap Save.  
89  
   
If the people to whom you send invitations use  
Google Calendar, they’ll receive an invitation in  
Calendar and by email.  
Inviting Guests to Your Event (Google  
Account Only)  
If you want to invite guests to your event, you need to  
create and add the event in your Google Calendar.   
An email invitation will be sent to your guests using  
your Google Account.  
5. Tap Save to add the event to your Google  
Calendar.  
Sending a Meeting Request   
(Exchange ActiveSync only)  
If you have an Exchange ActiveSync account set up on  
your device, you can use Calendar to create a meeting  
appointment and send a meeting request email to the  
people you want to invite to your meeting.  
1. Open Calendar and create a new event. For the  
steps, see “Creating an Event.”  
2. Tap the Calendar type at the top of the screen and  
then select your Google Account (or one of your  
other Google Calendars).  
3. Add details about the event, such as date and  
time, location, and more.  
1. Open Calendar and create a new event. For the  
steps, see “Creating an Event.”  
4. In the To field (below the Calendar type), enter the  
email addresses of everyone you want to invite to  
the event. Separate multiple addresses with  
commas.  
2. Tap the Calendar type at the top of the screen and  
then select your Exchange ActiveSync account.  
3. Add details about the event, such as date and  
time, location, and more.  
Tip: Tap  
to select the people you want to invite from your  
4. In the To field (below the Calendar type), enter the  
email addresses of everyone you want to invite to  
the event. Separate multiple addresses with  
commas.  
contacts list.  
90  
   
Press  
to keep the reminders pending in the  
Tip: Tap  
to select the meeting attendees from your  
contacts or the company directory.  
notifications area of the status bar.  
5. Tap Save to add the event and send the meeting  
Changing Calendar Views  
request to your invitees.  
When you open Calendar, it displays the Agenda view  
by default. You can also use day, week, or month view.  
To change between views, tap the buttons at the  
bottom of the screen.  
Event Alerts  
If you have set at least one reminder for an event, the  
upcoming event icon  
will appear in the notifications  
area of the status bar to remind you of the upcoming  
event.  
1. Tap the status bar, and then slide your finger down  
the screen to open the Notifications panel.  
1
2
3
4
5
2. Week view. See “Week View” on page 93.  
2. Do one of the following:  
Tap Clear to dismiss event reminders and all other  
notifications. Other types of notifications such as  
new messages and missed calls will also be  
deleted.  
After sliding open the Notifications panel, tap the  
calendar event reminder. You’ll then see a list of  
all pending event reminders. Tap Snooze all to  
snooze all event reminders for five minutes, or tap  
Dismiss all to dismiss all event reminders.  
5. Meeting invitations. Shows all received meeting  
invitations that you have not replied.  
91  
 
Agenda view shows a list of all your events in  
chronological order.  
Day and Agenda Views  
Day view displays a list of  
the events of one day and  
also shows weather  
information at the top of the  
screen when you’re viewing  
events of the current day.  
The colored bars on the  
left side of the events  
indicate the type of  
calendar the event is part  
of. To find out what each  
color represents, tap All  
calendars at the top of  
the screen.  
In day view, the weather  
information appears only if  
the event is within the  
fiveday forecast of the  
Weather app.  
When in day view, slide  
left or right across the  
screen to view earlier or  
later days.  
92  
 
Week View  
Month View  
Week view displays a chart of the events of one week.  
In Month view, you’ll see markers on days that have  
events.  
When in week view, you  
can:  
Do any of the following in  
month view:  
Press and hold on a time  
slot to create a new event  
at that time.  
Tap  
event.  
to create a new  
Tap an event (shown as  
colored blocks) to view  
its details.  
Tap a day to view the  
events of that day.  
Press and hold a day to  
open an options menu  
from which you can also  
choose to create an  
Slide left or right across  
the screen to view earlier  
or later weeks.  
event or switch to either  
Day or Agenda view.  
Slide up or down the  
screen to view earlier or  
later months.  
93  
   
Editing an Event  
Managing Calendar Events  
You can edit events that you have created.  
Viewing an Event  
1. While viewing an event, press  
Edit event.  
and tap   
You can view your own events as well as events that  
other people have shared with you.  
2. Make your changes to the event.  
1. In Day view or Agenda view, tap an event. The  
Event details screen then opens and shows the  
summary of the event.  
3. When you’re done editing, tap Save.  
Erasing Events  
2. Depending on the event information, do any of the  
following:  
Do any of the following:  
While viewing an event on the Event details  
Find the event’s location in Maps.  
screen, press  
and tap Delete event.  
Call any phone number included in the event  
location or description.  
In day, agenda, or week view, press and hold an  
event and tap Delete or Delete event.  
Check the participants of the event.  
When editing an event, tap Delete.  
If the event was sent as a meeting invitation,  
respond to the invitation.  
Sharing an Event (vCalendar)  
If it’s an Exchange ActiveSync calendar event,  
reply by email to the organizer or to all the guests.  
You can share a calendar event as a vCalendar to  
someone’s phone using Bluetooth or by sending it as a  
file attachment with your email or message.  
Press  
and either tap Reply or Reply all.  
Select any text and look it up on the Web.  
1. While viewing an event on the Event details screen,  
Tap the reminder time to change it. Press  
save changes.  
to  
press  
and tap Share vCalendar.  
94  
 
2. Do one of the following:  
Notes: By default, all your Google calendars are  
Tap Bluetooth. You’ll be asked to turn on  
Bluetooth on your device and connect to the  
receiving Bluetooth device.  
synchronized on your device.  
You cannot create a new Google calendar on your  
device. You can only sync with Google calendars that  
you created or subscribed to on the Web.  
Tap Mail. A new message window opens and  
automatically includes the vCalendar as an  
attachment. Your default email account will be  
used to send the message.  
The calendars are kept synchronized on your device,  
whether or not you hide them.  
Tap Message. A new message window opens  
and automatically includes the vCalendar as a  
multimedia attachment.  
Stop Synchronizing a Google Calendar  
You can choose which Google calendars to stop  
synchronizing.  
Displaying and Synchronizing Calendars  
1. In any Calendar view, tap All calendars.  
You can select which calendars to show or hide on  
your device’s Calendar, and which ones to keep  
synchronized.  
2. Clear the check box of the Google Calendar you  
want to remove from your calendars list.  
3. Press  
to update Calendar with the new  
changes and return to the Calendar view you were  
viewing.  
Showing or Hiding Calendars  
In any Calendar view, tap All calendars, and then select  
or clear a calendar to show or hide it. Tap All calendars  
to display all calendars.  
The calendars that you remove from your calendars list  
will no longer be synchronized on your device, but you  
remain subscribed to them and can work with them in  
Google Calendar on the Web.  
95  
   
Synchronizing an Exchange ActiveSync  
Calendar  
Changing Calendar Settings  
You can change Calendar settings to specify how it  
displays events and how it notifies you of upcoming  
events.  
If you have set up a Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync  
account on your device, you can also synchronize  
Exchange ActiveSync calendar events on your device.  
Calendar events on your Exchange ActiveSync will also  
show in Calendar if you chose to synchronize with the  
Exchange ActiveSync Server.  
In any Calendar view, press and then tap Settings to  
access the Calendar settings.  
Reminder settings  
All calendars Select this check box to use the  
same event reminder settings for all types of  
calendars. If you clear this check box, you can set  
different reminder settings for each calendar.  
To check if Exchange ActiveSync items are set to  
be synchronized, press and tap   
Settings > Accounts & sync > Exchange ActiveSync.  
>
Set alerts & notifications Configure event  
reminders to open an alert, send you a  
notification, or turn off event notifications on your  
device.  
Synchronizing an Outlook Calendar  
Default reminder time Choose how soon before an  
event you want to be notified.  
Select ringtone Choose a ringtone to sound when  
you receive an event reminder.  
Hide declined events Choose whether to show or  
hide events for which you've declined invitations.  
96  
Calendar view settings  
Calculator  
Start in Choose the default view to display when  
you open Calendar.  
Your device comes with a built-in calculator.  
First day of week Set the month and week views to  
start on a Sunday or Monday.  
1. Press  
and then tap  
> Calculator.  
2. Enter numbers or formulas using the onscreen  
keys.  
Include weather Select this check box to show  
weather information in the day view events list.  
– or –  
City If weather is included, by default, day view  
displays your current location’s weather. You can  
change it to display the weather of another city.  
Turn your device sideways to switch to a scientific  
calculator. The scientific calculator lets you perform  
more complex calculations with square root,  
logarithmic, and trigonometric functions.  
About the Calendar Widget  
Note: Tap  
to remove one digit at a time. Press and hold  
or tap Clear to delete the entire number.  
You can add a Calendar widget to your Home screen.  
The widgets offer different calendar views.  
3. Tap  
for the result.  
Tapping a day or event on the widget brings you to the  
Calendar app.  
97  
   
Tap the tabs at the bottom row or drag across the tabs  
to switch between the different functions of the Clock  
application.  
Clock  
Get more from the Clock app than just the regular date  
and time. Use your device as a desk clock complete  
with weather information or as a world clock so you  
can see what time it is in several cities across the  
globe. You can also use it as an alarm clock,  
stopwatch, and countdown timer.  
1
2
3
4
5
1. Desk Clock For more information, see “Desk  
Clock.”  
To open the Clock application:  
Tap the Clock widget on the Home screen.  
– or –  
2. World Clock For more information, see “World  
Clock.”  
Press  
and tap  
> Clock.  
3. Alarms For more information, see “Alarm Clock.”  
4. Stopwatch lets you use the clock as a stopwatch.  
5. Timer lets you use the clock as a timer.  
98  
   
1. Dim button dims the Desk Clock screen. To light up  
Desk Clock  
the screen again, tap anywhere on the screen.  
Opening the Clock application brings you directly to  
the Desk Clock screen.  
2. Screensaver button dims the screen and puts it in  
screensaver mode. When in screensaver mode,  
the time and date will change position on the  
screen after every few minutes. To light up the  
screen again, tap anywhere on the screen.  
The Desk Clock displays the current date, time, and  
weather, an alarm clock indicator, and a battery  
charging indicator. You can dim the screen to show  
only the time and date.  
3. Weather information of your current location.  
Tap the weather information to open the Weather  
application where you can see weather forecasts  
of the next few days. (For more information, see  
3
2
1
.
99  
   
3. Enter the city name you want to add. A list of  
matching cities and countries based on the letters  
you entered appear on the screen.  
World Clock  
Use the Clock application’s World Clock tab to check  
the current time in several places around the globe  
simultaneously. You can also set your home city, add  
more cities to the world clock list, and manually set  
your time zone, date, and time.  
4. Scroll through the matching list and tap the city  
that you want to add.  
To delete a city on the World Clock list:  
To set your home city:  
1. Press  
and tap  
> Clock > World Clock tab.  
1. Press  
and tap  
> Clock > World Clock tab.  
2. Press  
> Delete.  
2. Press  
> Home settings.  
3. Tap the cities you want to remove and tap Delete.  
3. Enter your home city. A list of matching cities and  
countries based on the letters you entered appear  
on the screen.  
To manually set the time zone, date, and time:  
To set the time zone, date, and time on your device  
manually, you need to turn off auto time  
synchronization first.  
4. Tap your city when it appears on the list. Your  
home city will appear at the top of the list of cities.  
1. Press  
and tap  
> Clock > World Clock tab.  
To add cities to the World Clock list:  
2. Press  
> Local time settings.  
Add more cities to the World Clock screen so you can  
instantly check the date and time in these cities.  
3. Clear the Automatic check box and then set the  
time zone, date, and time as required.  
1. Press  
and tap  
> Clock > World Clock tab.  
For more information, see “Date & Time Settings” on  
2. Press  
> Add city.  
100  
   
Setting an Alarm  
Alarm Clock  
1. Press  
and tap  
> Clock > Alarms tab.  
You can use the Clock application’s Alarms tab to set  
up one or more wake-up alarms.  
2. Tap one of the default alarms on the screen.  
3. In the Set alarm screen, set the alarm time by  
sliding your finger up or down on the numbers  
and AM/PM.  
4. Enter the alarm Description, set the Alarm sound  
and Repeat, and select the Vibrate check box if you  
want the device to vibrate when the alarm goes off.  
5. Tap Done.  
Tip: If you need to set more than three alarms, you can add  
more alarms by pressing  
and tapping Add alarm.  
Note: You can temporarily disable an alarm by clearing the  
check box ( ) of the alarm on the Alarms tab.  
Deleting an Alarm  
1. On the Alarms tab, press  
and tap Delete.  
2. Select the alarms you want to delete and then tap  
Delete.  
101  
   
Changing Alarm Sound Settings  
Flashlight  
If you’ve set one or more alarms, you can change their  
settings such as the alarm volume, how long to snooze  
the alarm, and more.  
Never be caught in the dark again. Use the Flashlight  
application to turn on your device’s LED flashlight to  
shine a light wherever you need it.  
1. Press  
and tap  
> Clock > Alarms tab.  
1. Press  
and tap  
> Flashlight.  
2. Press  
> Settings to change any of the following:  
To adjust the brightness of the light, simply tap the  
onscreen power button on the flashlight handle.  
Alarm in silent mode (default) allows the alarm to  
sound even when your device’s volume is set to  
silent mode. Clear this check box if you want to  
silence the alarm when the volume is in silent mode.  
Press  
mode.  
to switch to Auto flash, SOS, or Manual  
2. To close the flashlight, press  
.
Alarm volume set the volume level that you want  
for the alarm.  
Snooze duration set how long to snooze between  
alarms.  
Side button behavior determines what happens to  
the alarm when pressing the volume buttons. You  
can set the button to snooze, dismiss the alarm,  
or disable the button. The side button works only  
when the device’s screen is not locked.  
While on the lock screen, you can snooze or  
dismiss the alarm by pressing and holding the  
Snooze or Dismiss button and then dragging it  
inside the lock screen ring.  
102  
   
7. Tap anywhere on the screen to use these controls:  
Reading eBooks  
Quickly jump between chapters by  
dragging the slider.  
Start your own library of bestsellers and literary classics  
right on your device. Use the Reader application to  
read and download eBooks from Kobo, an online  
bookstore.  
View the table of contents and your  
bookmarked pages. You can also see the notes  
and highlights that you’ve marked in the eBook.  
Add a bookmark.  
We’ve included some eBooks for you to try. To browse  
for more titles from Kobo, you need to be connected to  
the Internet.  
Change the font size.  
Recommend the eBook to your friends. You  
can share the book title in your social networks, or  
send it as a text message or email.  
1. Press  
and tap  
> Reader.  
2. Slide your finger left or right across the screen to  
browse through the available eBooks. You can also  
tap to browse through these eBooks in list view.  
8. When you're done reading, press  
eBook.  
to close the  
3. Tap an eBook to open it.  
Note: When you reopen an eBook, it will take you to the page  
that you last viewed.  
4. Slide your finger left or right to flip through pages  
in the eBook.  
Searching Inside an eBook  
5. To zoom in or out, spread or pinch your thumb and  
1. While reading an eBook, press  
.
index fingers across the page.  
2. Type the word or words you want to search for.  
6. To view in landscape, turn your device sideways.  
3. Tap . You’ll see a list of chapters that contain the  
matches.  
103  
   
4. Tap a chapter to preview where the matches  
Viewing Your Notes and Highlights  
appear.  
1. Tap anywhere in the eBook you’re reading, and  
then tap .  
5. Tap a match to go to the page that contains the  
text you're looking for.  
2. Go to the Notes tab or Highlights tab to view the  
information that you want.  
If you want to take your search further, select the text  
and then tap Quick Lookup. For more information on  
Downloading an eBook  
Browse the bookstore and choose from hundreds of  
available titles to download.  
Adding a Note or Highlighting Selected Text  
You need to have:  
Spotted an interesting quote or an unusual fact? Make  
a note or highlight text.  
a microSD card installed on your device.  
an active Wi-Fi or data connection.  
1. While reading an eBook, press and hold on a  
word, and then drag the start and end markers to  
select the surrounding text.  
a Kobo account and an Adobe® ID account. If  
you don’t have these accounts yet, either sign up  
from your device or from your computer’s Web  
browser. (On your computer, go to:  
2. On the pop-up bar, tap:  
Highlight to mark the selected text with your  
choice of color.  
New note to add a short comment or remark.  
1. If you have not yet logged in to Kobo and Adobe ID  
accounts, press , and then tap Accounts to sign in.  
2. On the Reader main screen, tap  
.
104  
3. In the eBooks by Kobo tab (  
) , do any of the  
Adding the My Shelf Widget  
following to find a book:  
Use the My Shelf widget to easily open your eBooks for  
reading right from your Home screen.  
Tap a category to see available book titles.  
View more categories. Press  
, and then tap  
Browse or Discover.  
Sharing Games and Applications  
Press  
to find a specific book title or author.  
Having fun with a game or application that you’ve  
downloaded from Android Market? Share it instantly  
with your circle of friends.  
4. Tap the eBook you want to download. You’ll then  
see information such as the eBook’s price, its  
summary and ratings.  
Note: For your friends to link to the app and download it from  
the Android Market, they must be using an Android  
device.  
5. Tap  
6. Provide your purchase details, and then tap Buy.  
7. Tap to download the eBook. When  
to place your order.  
1. Press  
and tap  
.
downloading is complete, you’ll find the eBook in  
your library.  
2. Press  
and tap Share.  
After you’ve used Kobo once to purchase an  
eBook, your device remembers your billing  
details so you don’t need to enter them the next  
time.  
If you’ve previously bought eBooks from Kobo  
using your computer, go to the Available for  
download tab (  
) in Reader to download  
them to your device.  
105  
 
You’ll the see the list of games and apps that you  
downloaded and installed from Android Market.  
Messages  
Send the link in a text message. See  
163.  
Peep  
Share the link on Twitter. See “Tweeting on  
Twitter  
Post the link to Twitter. You need to  
sign in to your Twitter account before  
you can post the link to the  
application.  
When your friends see the link in your sent  
message, email message, or tweet, they can  
simply tap the link to go directly to the game or  
app in Android Market to download it.  
3. Tap an app, and then choose how to share it.  
Bluetooth  
Send the link using Bluetooth. See  
Tips: While entering your status update in Friend Stream, you  
can also tap  
> App recommendation to choose  
Friend  
Stream  
Post the link to Facebook and Twitter. See  
from games or apps that you want to share in your  
social networks.  
Gmail  
Send the link using your Gmail account.  
If you’ve already created a new text or email message,  
press , and then tap Attach > App recommendation  
to choose from your list of installed games and apps.  
Mail  
Send the link using your POP3/IMAP or  
Exchange ActiveSync email account. See  
106  
Make a call. Quickly dial Favorites, dial someone  
from your call history list, or use the Dialer. (See  
more details.)  
Car Panel  
With the Car Panel, you can easily access footprints,  
locate places in Google Maps, and navigate to a  
destination that you want. You can also make calls and  
search the Web.  
Making a Call in Car Panel  
1. Press  
and tap  
> Car Panel.  
1. Press  
and tap  
> Car Panel.  
2. On the Car Panel screen, tap Make a call, and then  
2. Tap the buttons on the Car Panel screen:  
tap any of the available buttons:  
Footprints. Check the places you’ve been before,  
and then choose one to set as your destination.  
(See “Footprints” on page 261 for more details.)  
Favorites. Access your favorites and tap one to  
place your call.  
Recent calls. See a list of your recent calls and tap  
one to place your call.  
Navigation. Get help navigating to your destination  
using Google Maps Navigation. (See “Getting  
Directions” on page 257 for more details.)  
Dialer. Use the Dialer to dial a number or contact  
name directly.  
Voice search. Search the Web with Google search  
by simply dictating words into your device’s  
microphone.  
Exiting Car Panel  
View map. View a map of your location using  
for more details.)  
On the Car Panel screen, press  
and tap Exit.  
Notes: You can also press and hold the status bar, drag it  
down to open the Notifications panel, and then tap  
Car mode enabled.  
Search. Search the Web with Google search by  
entering a word or phrase.  
Pressing  
or  
will not close the Car Panel.  
107  
       
Dock Mode  
Polaris Office  
Place the device on the dock to switch to Dock Mode  
and display the weather in your current location, time,  
Friend Stream updates, and shortcuts to your photos,  
Connected Media, and Calendar.  
Use Polaris Office to view and edit Microsoft® Office  
Word (.doc and .docx), Microsoft® Office Excel® (.xls  
and .xlsx), Microsoft® Office PowerPoint® files (.ppt, .pps,  
and .pptx), and text (.txt) files on your device.  
Make sure you have copied the files to the device’s  
microSD card before you open Polaris Office.  
Notes: The HTC EVO 3D dock is purchased separately and  
is not included in the box.  
While in Dock Mode, the device’s buttons are  
Viewing a Document  
disabled except for  
access the settings.  
which you can press to  
1. Press  
and tap  
> Polaris Office. (You may  
need to scroll down the screen to see the icon.)  
Using Dock Mode  
2. Tap the file you want to open.  
1. Place the device on the dock.  
Tip: If you have a long file list, press  
and tap Sort to  
2. While in Dock Mode, you can:  
arrange your file by name or date. Press  
specific filenames.  
to look for  
Tap  
to dim the screen.  
Press  
and tap Settings to change the Dock  
Mode settings.  
Tap the shortcut icons at the bottom of the screen  
to start a slideshow of your photos, launch  
Connected Media, or access your calendar.  
3. To exit Dock Mode, tap  
device from the dock.  
or disconnect the  
108  
       
3. While viewing a file, you can:  
Adobe Reader  
Slide your finger on the screen to pan or go  
through the pages.  
Use Adobe Reader to view PDF files that you have  
copied or downloaded to the device’s microSD card.  
Turn your device sideways to view the file in  
landscape mode.  
Viewing a PDF File  
To zoom in, spread your thumb and index finger  
across the screen. To zoom out, pinch your thumb  
and index finger on the screen.  
1. Press  
and tap  
> Adobe Reader.  
2. Tap the PDF Files tab and tap the file.  
Editing a Document  
– or –  
Tap the Recently Viewed tab to see a list of PDF  
files that you have previously opened on your  
device, and then tap the file that you want to view.  
1. Press  
and tap  
> Polaris Office.  
2. Tap the file you want to edit.  
3. Do any of the following:  
If your file is a Microsoft Office Word, a Microsoft  
3. While viewing a PDF file:  
Spread or pinch the screen to zoom in or out.  
Drag to scroll through the pages.  
Office PowerPoint, or a plain text document,   
press  
and tap Edit.  
Press  
and then tap View Mode > Reflow Text to  
If your file is a Microsoft Office Excel document,  
tap a cell and then enter your changes in the text  
box. To choose a different worksheet, press  
and tap Worksheet.  
temporarily enlarge and fit the text to the width of  
the screen for easier reading. To change back to  
the original view, press  
again and then tap  
View Mode > Continuous Scroll or Fit to Screen.  
4. When done, press  
and tap Save or Save as to  
Tip: To open another PDF file, press and then tap Open.  
keep your changes.  
109  
       
Back up and sync information from your device to  
your computer before you do a factory reset or a  
software (ROM) upgrade of your device.  
HTC Sync  
You have your new vacation photos on your device  
while your business calendar is on your computer. Why  
not make these types of files and information available  
on both devices? With HTC Sync™ you can:  
Notes: You must have an installed storage card on your  
device to sync multimedia files and documents.  
The available categories and options depend on the  
device you've connected to your computer.  
Synchronize contacts between Microsoft Outlook,  
Outlook Express, or Windows Contacts on your  
computer and your device.  
Here’s what you need to do to install, set up, and use  
HTC Sync on your computer:  
Sync your calendar events between the Outlook or  
Windows Calendar on your computer and your  
device.  
1. Download the HTC Sync installer from htc.com/us/  
support. For the steps on how to install HTC on your  
computer, see “Installing HTC Sync.”  
Bring your photos, videos, documents, songs, and  
playlists from your computer to your device so you  
can enjoy them on the go.  
2. Connect your device to your computer using the  
supplied USB cable and set up HTC Sync to  
recognize your device. Follow the steps in “Setting  
111.  
Easily import your captured photos and videos from  
your device to your computer.  
Sync bookmarks in the HTC Bookmarks favorites  
folder on your computer and all bookmarks stored  
on your device’s Web browser.  
3. Choose the information to sync between your  
computer and your device and how you want to  
sync your selections.  
Install third-party mobile phone apps (not  
downloaded from Android Market) from your  
computer.  
110  
     
To easily set up synchronization using HTC Sync’s  
guided wizard, follow the steps in “Setting Up  
Setting Up HTC Sync to Recognize Your  
Device  
1. Connect your device to the computer with the  
supplied USB cable. Or, if your device is already  
connected, press and hold the status bar and drag  
your finger down to open the Notifications panel.  
Then tap the status that shows Select to change  
USB connection type.  
4. Sync your computer with your device automatically  
Installing HTC Sync  
Important: The HTC Sync version that you’ve downloaded  
can be installed on Microsoft Windows XP,  
Windows Vista, and Windows 7.  
2. On the Choose a connection type screen, tap HTC  
Sync and then tap Done.  
HTC Sync requires USB 2.0 on your computer to  
connect and sync with your device.  
3. Your device will attempt to find HTC Sync on your  
computer. Wait for a few seconds for the process  
to finish.  
For trouble-free installation, first quit all running  
programs and temporarily disable your anti-virus  
program before you begin installing HTC Sync.  
Note: If your device displays a message indicating that it’s  
unable to find HTC Sync, try disconnecting and  
reconnecting the USB cable, and then repeat step 2.  
1. On your computer, double-click HTCSync.exe and  
follow the onscreen instructions to install HTC  
Sync.  
4. When your device finds HTC Sync, your computer  
will display the Phone Connection Wizard. Click  
Next.  
2. After installing HTC Sync, the HTC Sync icon is  
added to your computer’s system tray (check the  
bottom-right side of your computer screen). You  
can double-click this icon to open HTC Sync.  
5. Enter the name you want for your device, and then  
click Finish.  
111  
     
6. Check the HTC Sync icon at the bottom right side  
of your computer screen. If it is green, that means  
your device has successfully connected with your  
computer and HTC Sync recognizes your device.  
The Sync now button lets you start syncing the  
categories and options you've selected.  
The estimated storage usage bar beside the Sync  
now button shows you the estimated microSD card  
space that will be used when there are new items to  
be synchronized and added to your device.  
Getting to Know the Workspace  
Setting Up Synchronization  
On the Device panel, you can set your sync options,  
see your device’s general information, check the used  
and available space on your microSD card, and begin  
synchronization.  
You can choose the types of files and information you  
want to sync between your device and computer.  
Music Sync Options  
Notes: You must have an installed storage card on your  
Bring the music tracks and songs you play on your  
computer to your device. If you have playlists created in  
Apple® iTunes® or Microsoft® Windows Media® Player,  
you can sync these too and enjoy them on the go.  
device to sync multimedia files and documents.  
The available categories and options depend on the  
device you've connected to your computer.  
Note: You can sync audio files in these formats: *.aac, *.amr,  
You can click a category of items to see its sync  
options on the right side of the Device panel.  
Clicking Overview displays your device’s basic  
software information and microSD card usage,  
change the device name, or install third-party  
applications to your device.  
*.m4a, *.mid, *.midi, *.mp3, *.wav, and *.wma.  
1. On the Device panel, click Music and then click the  
On button.  
Turning Music sync on means you want this  
category included every time you sync your  
computer and device.  
112  
 
2. Select Sync music files from, and then click Add.  
2. To automatically import your camera shots to your  
computer during synchronization, select   
Copy device Camera Shots to PC.  
3. Choose the folder that contains your audio files,  
and then click OK.  
Photos and videos from your storage card will be  
saved to the \My Photos\Device Camera Shots  
folder on your computer.  
All supported audio files added to this folder will  
also be copied to your device’s storage card  
during synchronization.  
3. Select Sync PC photos & videos from, and then click  
4. Select Sync music files from iTunes and Windows  
Media Player if you’re using iTunes or Windows  
Media Player on your computer, and then choose  
the playlists you want to sync on your device.  
Add.  
4. Choose the folder on your computer that contains  
your multimedia files, and then click OK.  
All supported image and video files added to this  
folder will also be copied to your device’s storage  
card during synchronization.  
Gallery Sync Options  
You can automatically sync photos and videos  
between your device and computer.  
Calendar Sync Options  
Note: You can sync photos and videos in these formats:  
Your device can sync appointments and events with  
your calendar in Outlook (Outlook XP, Outlook 2003, or  
Outlook 2007) or Windows Calendar.  
Photos: *.bmp, *.gif, *.jpeg, *.jpg, and *.png.  
Videos: *.3gp, *.3g2, *.mp4, and *.wmv.  
1. On the Device panel, click Gallery, and then click  
the On button.  
1. On the Device panel, click Calendar, and then click  
the On button.  
Turning Gallery sync on means you want this  
category included every time you sync your  
computer and device.  
Turning Calendar sync on means you want this  
category included every time you sync your  
computer and device.  
113  
2. Select the application you want to sync calendar  
3. In cases when conflicting information is found on  
both the device and computer, choose which  
information you want to keep.  
events with.  
3. Choose from which point you want to start  
synchronizing your calendar events.  
Note: Only the contact fields supported on your device will be  
synchronized.  
4. In cases where conflicting information is found on  
both the device and computer, choose which  
information you want to keep.  
Bookmarks Sync Options  
Sync Web browser bookmarks between your device  
and computer.  
Note: Only the calendar fields supported on your device will  
be synchronized.  
Important: If you are using Google Chrome or Firefox Internet  
browser and have selected it to sync with your  
device, make sure to close all browser windows  
before you begin synchronization.  
People Sync Options  
Sync your phone contacts with your Outlook (Outlook  
XP, Outlook 2003 or Outlook 2007), Outlook Express, or  
Windows Contacts.  
1. On the Device panel, click Bookmarks, and then  
click the On button.  
1. On the Device panel, click People, and then click  
the On button.  
Turning Bookmarks sync on means you want this  
category included every time you sync your  
computer and device.  
Turning People sync on means you want this  
category included every time you sync your  
computer and device.  
2. Select the Web browser that stores the bookmarks  
you want to sync to your device.  
2. Choose the application you want to sync your  
contacts with.  
Important: When conflicting information is found on both the  
device and computer, HTC Sync keeps the  
information from your computer.  
114  
2. To sync email attachments that you’ve stored on  
your device’s microSD card, select Copy all  
download Mail documents to PC.  
Documents Sync Options  
You can sync files and documents from your computer  
to your device. You can also sync email attachments  
that you stored on your device’s microSD card to your  
computer.  
3. To sync files and documents from your computer  
to your device’s storage card, select Sync PC  
documents from, and then click Add.  
Notes: To open a document on your device, you’ll need a  
compatible app. Usually, your phone can open and  
view these file types: Microsoft Office 2003 and 2007  
Word (*.doc, *.docx), Excel (*.xls, *.xlsx), and  
4. Choose a folder that contains the files you want to  
sync with your device, and then click OK.  
Email attachments from your device’s microSD  
card will be saved to the \My Documents\Device  
documents\ folder on your computer. Documents  
from your computer will be saved to the   
\My Documents\Device documents\ folder on your  
microSD card.  
PowerPoint (*.ppt, *.pptx), PDF files (*.pdf), and text files  
(*.txt). You may have installed other apps capable of  
working with additional file types.  
To sync email attachments stored on your device’s  
microSD card to your computer, you must set up an  
Exchange ActiveSync or POP3/IMAP email account  
on your device using Mail. For more information on  
Synchronizing Your Device  
Check the estimated usage bar beside the Sync now  
button for the estimated file size of new items to sync  
on your device.  
1. On the Device panel, click Documents, and then  
click the On button.  
1. After you’ve installed and configured HTC Sync,  
Turning Documents sync on means you want this  
category included every time you sync your  
computer and device.  
click the Sync now button.  
2. After synchronization is complete, click Disconnect  
115  
3. Safely remove your device as required by your  
computer’s operating system.  
2. Connect your device to the computer with the  
supplied USB cable.  
– or –  
The next time you connect your device to your  
computer, synchronization automatically begins based  
on your sync options.  
If your device is already connected, press the  
status bar and drag down to open the Notifications  
panel. Tap the status that shows Select to change  
USB connection type.  
Installing Apps From Your Computer to  
Your Device  
If you have applications (files with an .apk extension) on  
your computer, you can use HTC Sync to install them  
to your device. We strongly recommend you install only  
applications that you trust.  
3. On the Choose a connection type screen in your  
device, tap HTC Sync and then tap Done.  
4. On your computer, double-click the HTC Sync icon  
in the system tray ( ) to open HTC Sync.  
5. On the Device panel, click Overview.  
1. On your device, press  
>
, tap Settings >  
6. Click Application installer.  
Applications, and then select the Unknown sources  
check box to allow applications from your  
computer to be installed to your device.  
7. Browse for the application file on your computer,  
and then click Open. The installation process starts  
on your device.  
Note: You only have to do this step once. You do not need to  
do this step again next time you install another  
8. Check your device’s screen to see if there are  
additional instructions to complete the installation.  
application from your computer to your device.  
9. After installation is complete, you can click  
Disconnect.  
116  
10. Safely remove your device as required by your  
Downloading the Latest HTC Sync  
Upgrade  
computer’s operating system.  
Synchronizing Another Device With Your  
Computer  
You can switch from one device to another, if you have  
more than one device to sync.  
Visit the HTC support website (htc.com/support) from  
time to time to check for the most recent HTC Sync  
upgrade so you can download and install it on your  
computer.  
After installing the latest upgrade, set up HTC Sync  
again to recognize and sync with your device. Follow  
the steps in “Setting Up HTC Sync to Recognize Your  
Device” on page 103 and “Setting Up Synchronization”  
on page 104.  
1. Connect another device to your computer, and  
then set up HTC Sync to recognize this device.  
2. Click the device you want to set up or begin  
synchronization. The Device panel then opens,  
where you can separately customize your sync  
settings for this device.  
To switch to another device to sync, click Devices, and  
then click the device’s name or image.  
117  
 
After signing up to HTCSense.com on the Web, you  
have to sign in using the same account credentials on  
your device.  
HTCSense.com  
Signing Up for Your HTCSense.com  
Account  
You can sign up for your HTCSense.com account on  
your device or your computer’s Web browser.  
Updating Your HTCSense.com Account Details  
1. On your computer, open your Web browser and  
sign in to your HTCSense.com account.  
2. Click Account in the upper-right corner.  
Signing Up From Your Device  
3. Update your account details, and then click Save  
Changes.  
1. Press  
>
, tap Settings > Accounts & sync.  
2. Tap Add account > HTC Sense.  
Using HTCSense.com  
3. Follow the onscreen instructions to sign up for your  
HTCSense.com account.  
Forgot your device at home or you can’t find it? Or  
worse, it slipped out of your pocket on your way to  
work. Use HTCSense.com to communicate with your  
device so you can forward calls and messages to a  
different number, make the device ring, lock it, and  
even erase its contents.  
Signing Up From Your Computer  
Make sure you have your device close by. You’ll need it  
to complete the sign-up process.  
1. On your computer, open your Web browser.  
To use these features, you’ll need to sign in to  
HTCSense.com on a computer Web browser.  
2. Go to htcsense.com.  
3. Follow the onscreen instructions to sign up for your  
HTCSense.com account.  
118  
       
Turning On Phone Finder  
Locating Your Device  
Some features of HTCSense.com require that the  
Phone finder option your device is selected.  
Can’t remember where you left your device? You can  
use HTCSense.com to find its approximate location.  
1. On your device, press  
>
and tap   
Note: You must have the Phone finder option selected in  
Settings > Location on your device for this feature to  
work.  
Settings > Location.  
2. Select the Phone finder check box.  
On HTCSense.com, check the map to see where  
the device is. Click Refresh location to refresh the  
map.  
Forwarding Calls and Messages and  
Making the Device Ring  
You can forward calls and messages to another phone  
if you don’t have your device with you. Or you can  
make the device ring even if you left it on mute, so that  
you can find it.  
Locking Your Device  
If you lose your device, you can lock it and show a  
message onscreen so if somebody finds it, they can  
contact you.  
On HTCSense.com, do one of the following:  
1. On HTCSense.com, click Lock device.  
Click the Forward calls or Forward messages  
switch. Set the call or message forwarding  
options and click Save.  
2. Enter a PIN, an alternate phone number to call if  
somebody finds the device, and a short message  
to show onscreen.  
Click Ring.  
Note: The alternate number and message are shown on the  
device’s screen. If your device is found, they can simply  
tap the message to call.  
3. Click Save.  
119  
     
Erasing the Contents of Your Device  
Updating Your Device  
If you can’t get your device back, you can erase the  
contents of your device and the installed microSD card  
so no one sees sensitive information on your device.  
To download software updates to your device:  
Press  
>
> Settings > System updates >  
Firmware update. (Your device automatically  
downloads and installs any available updates. You  
may be required to power your device off and  
back on to complete the software upgrade.)  
Note: There’s no way to recover data on your device and  
microSD card after you’ve erase the contents so be  
absolutely sure before you proceed.  
1. On HTCSense.com, click Erase device.  
2. When asked to confirm, enter your HTCSense.com  
password and click Erase device.  
Deleting Your HTCSense.com Account  
1. On your computer, open your Web browser and  
sign in to your HTCSense.com account.  
2. On the upper-right corner, click Account.  
3. Click Click here to delete your HTCSense account.  
Deleting your HTCSense.com account will also  
delete your data on HTCSense.com servers.  
120  
       
Automatic Speech Recognition  
(ASR)  
2F. Voice Services  
You can use your device’s built-in automatic speech  
recognition (ASR) software to dial a phone number in  
People or to launch device functions. All you have to do  
is to talk into the device, and ASR will recognize your  
voice and complete tasks by itself.  
Activating ASR  
Press  
and then tap  
> Voice Dialer. (You may  
need to scroll down the screen to see the icon.)  
The screen displays “Listening...” and the device  
prompts you to say the name of the command you  
want to use. To complete your task, simply follow the  
voice prompts.  
Available ASR commands include:  
Call <Name or Voicemail> to call an entry in your  
People list or voicemail. (See “Making a Voice Call  
With ASR.”)  
Dial <Number> to dial a spoken phone number.  
Redial to dial the last outgoing call.  
121  
       
Open <Application Name> to open an application in  
4. Tap YES to confirm or CANCEL to cancel the  
command; or choose from a menu if ASR is not  
sure what you would like to do.  
Tip: Use ASR in a quiet environment so it can accurately  
Opening Applications With ASR  
recognize your commands.  
You can jump directly to many applications by saying  
“Open” followed by the application name.  
Note: Regardless of which command you use, you will be  
asked to confirm your choice, or choose from a menu  
if ASR is not sure what you would like to do.  
1. Press  
and then tap  
> Voice Dialer.  
2. Wait until you hear a tone and the word  
“Listening...” appears on the screen.  
Making a Voice Call With ASR  
1. Press  
and then tap  
> Voice Dialer.  
3. Say “Open [application name]” to open an  
application in your device.  
2. Wait until you hear a tone and the word  
“Listening...” appears on the screen.  
4. Tap YES to confirm or CANCEL to cancel the  
command; or choose from a menu if ASR is not  
sure what you would like to do.  
3. Say “Call [contact name]” to call a person stored in  
your contacts list.  
– or –  
Say “Dial [contact number]” to dial a spoken  
phone number.  
Note: When dialing a phone number, numbers can be three  
digits (for example, 911), seven digits (for example,   
555-1234), or ten digits (for example, 222-555-1234).  
122  
     
Sharing Voice Memo  
Managing Voice Memos  
1. Press  
and then tap  
> Voice Recorder.  
Use your device’s Voice Recorder to record brief  
memos to remind you of important events, phone  
numbers, grocery list items, or to create a ring tone.  
2. On the Voice Recorder screen, tap  
.
3. On the All recordings screen, press and hold the  
voice memo you want to share, and then tap Share  
on the options menu.  
Recording Voice Memos  
4. On the Share options menu, select how you want  
1. Press  
and then tap  
> Voice Recorder.   
to share the voice memo.  
(You may need to scroll down the screen to see  
the icon.)  
To learn how to send files using Bluetooth, see “Using  
2. Tap  
microphone.  
and speak into the device’s  
Setting a Voice Memo as Your Ringtone  
3. To end the recording, tap  
Managing Voice Memos  
Playing Voice Memos  
.
1. Press  
and then tap  
> Voice Recorder.  
2. On the Voice Recorder screen, tap  
.
3. On the All recordings screen, press and hold the  
voice memo you want to set as a ring tone, and  
then tap Set as ringtone on the options menu.  
After recording a voice memo, tap  
.
– or –  
Tap  
and then tap the file you want to play.  
123  
   
Renaming Voice Memos  
Voice Input  
1. Press  
and then tap  
> Voice Recorder.  
You can dictate words to enter them in most text fields  
that let you use the onscreen keyboard.  
2. On the Voice Recorder screen, tap  
.
3. On the All recordings screen, press and hold the  
voice memo you want to rename, and then tap  
Rename on the options menu.  
Press and hold the Voice input key (  
device cues you to “Speak now,” tell your device what  
you want to type.  
). When your  
4. Enter the new name and tap Save.  
Notes: First make sure to select the language you’ll be  
using in the Voice input & output settings.  
Erasing Voice Memos  
Since your device uses Google’s speech recognition  
service, you need to be connected to the Internet to  
enter text by speaking.  
1. Press  
and then tap  
> Voice Recorder.  
2. On the Voice Recorder screen, tap  
.
3. On the All recordings, press  
and then tap  
Selecting the Voice Input Language  
Delete.  
1. Press  
>
, and then tap Settings >   
4. Do any of the following:  
Voice input & output > Voice recognizer settings.  
To erase one or more voice memos, select the  
check boxes at the right side of the voice memo  
names, and then tap Delete.  
2. Tap Language, and then choose the language you  
want.  
Available languages depend on the voice input  
languages supported by Google.  
To erase all voice memos, press  
, tap Select All  
and then tap Delete.  
124  
     
Your Device’s microSD Card  
2G. microSD Card  
The microSD Card  
Your device is equipped with a 2 GB microSDTM  
(Secure Digital) memory card that allows you to store  
images, videos, music, documents, and voice data on  
your device.  
Important: Your device comes with the microSD card  
preinstalled.  
You can easily damage the microSD card by  
improper operation. Please be careful when  
inserting, removing, or handling the microSD  
card.  
Make sure your battery is fully charged before  
using the microSD card. Your data may become  
damaged or unusable if the battery runs out  
while using the microSD card.  
125  
       
3. Gently pull the microSD card from the slot.  
Removing the microSD Card  
1. With the device turned off, insert a coin or other flat  
object into the slot at the bottom of the battery  
compartment cover and lift up gently to remove.  
2. Lift the battery out at the notch at the bottom of the  
battery compartment.  
126  
 
Inserting the microSD Card  
Viewing the microSD Card Memory  
1. Remove the battery compartment cover and  
battery. For more information, see “Removing the  
With the microSD card inserted and the device  
turned on, press and tap Settings >   
SD & phone storage. (The total and available  
>
memory space will be displayed.)  
2. Insert the microSD card to the slot.  
Erasing the microSD Card  
Erasing a microSD card permanently removes all files  
stored on the card.  
1. Press  
>
and tap Settings.  
2. Scroll down the screen, tap SD & phone storage >  
Unmount SD card > Erase SD card >   
Erase SD card > Erase everything.  
Notes: The formatting procedure erases all the data on the  
microSD card, after which the files CANNOT be  
retrieved. To prevent the loss of important data, please  
check the contents before you format the card.  
When you unmount the SD card, you need to remove  
and then reinsert the microSD card or turn the device  
off and then on for the device to recognize the  
microSD card again.  
3. Re-install the battery and the battery compartment  
cover.  
127  
 
Unmounting the microSD Card  
Using the Device’s microSD Card  
as a USB Drive  
When you need to remove the microSD card, you must  
unmount the microSD card first to prevent corrupting  
the data stored on it or damaging the microSD card.  
Since you will remove the battery first before you can  
remove the microSD card, close all running  
To transfer music, pictures, and other files from your  
computer to your device’s microSD card, you need   
to set the device’s microSD card as a USB drive.  
applications on your device and save any data first.  
1. Connect the device to your computer using the  
supplied USB cable.  
1. Press  
>
and tap Settings.  
2. Scroll down the screen, tap SD & phone storage >  
Unmount SD card.  
2. When the Choose a connection type screen  
appears, tap Disk drive, and then tap Done.  
3. Remove the microSD card by following the  
3. On your computer, the connected device is  
recognized as a removable disk. Navigate to this  
removable disk and open it.  
4. Do one of the following:  
Copy files from the computer to the root folder on  
the device’s storage card.  
Copy files from the device’s storage card to a  
folder on your computer or computer desktop.  
128  
   
5. After copying the files, unmount the removable  
disk (that is, the connected device) as required by  
your computer’s operating system to safely remove  
your device, and do either of the following:  
Disconnect the device from the computer.  
If you want to keep the device connected to the  
computer but want the device to be able to  
access and use the storage card, open the  
Notifications panel, tap Disk drive, select an option  
other than Disk drive, and then tap Done.  
Note: The device will not recognize the microSD card when it  
is connected to a computer as a disk drive. You will not  
be able to use some of the device’s applications such  
as the camera or Music.  
129  
 
Taking Pictures and Shooting  
Videos  
2H. Camera & Video  
Whether traveling for business or fun, enjoy taking  
photos and videos of your trip and encounters with  
your device’s camera.  
Important: Be sure the microSD card is present before you  
use your device’s camera. Photos and videos  
captured with the camera are stored onto the  
microSD card. For more information on how to  
install a microSD card on your device, see  
Launching the Camera  
To launch the camera in photo mode and take  
photos, press and tap > Camera.  
To launch the camera directly in video mode so  
you can immediately start capturing videos,   
press  
and tap  
> Camcorder.  
130  
             
3. Auto focus indicator For more information, see  
Viewfinder Screen and Other Controls  
When you’re in photo mode and you turn your device  
left or right, the onscreen camera controls automatically  
rotate depending on how you hold your device.  
4. Effects button For more information, see “Adding  
Effects.”  
5. Photo/Video mode switch: Easily switch between  
photo or video mode.  
You’ll find the following controls on the Viewfinder screen:  
6. Flash button Choose a flash mode depending on  
8
7
6
5
4
your lighting conditions.  
7. Shutter release/Record button For more  
Videos.”  
8. Switch to front or main camera button For more  
information, see “Using the Front Camera.”  
Additional camera controls are located at the right  
side of the device.  
9
10  
1 2  
3
1. Zoom bar For more information, see “Zooming.”  
2. Gallery button Shows the last photo or video you’ve  
captured. Tap to view the photo or video in Gallery.  
For more information, see “Viewing Pictures and  
9. Camera button Launches the camera and functions  
as a convenient shutter release and record button.  
10. 2D/3D switch For more information, see “Capturing  
131  
 
Zooming  
Auto Focusing  
Before taking a photo or video, you can first use the  
onscreen zoom bar to zoom in or out of your subject.  
Whenever you point the camera at a different subject or  
location, it shows the auto focus indicator at the center  
of the viewfinder screen.  
Simply slide your finger up or down the zoom bar to  
zoom in or out.  
You can leave the auto focus indicator at the center of  
the screen, or you can move it by tapping another area  
on the screen that you want to focus on.  
Capturing Photos and Videos in 3D  
The device’s camera system lets you capture photos  
and videos in glasses-free 3D. That means you can  
enjoy viewing the 3D media you’ve captured without  
wearing 3D glasses.  
To capture photos and record videos in 3D, slide the  
2D/3D switch to 3D before you take a picture or record  
a video clip.  
When you’re recording video, the zoom bar is always  
shown onscreen. You can freely zoom in or out while  
recording.  
132  
           
Adding Effects  
WARNING:  
• If you experience eye strain, headaches, dizziness, nausea,  
or other symptoms, immediately stop using the 3D function  
until symptoms end.  
It’s easy to make your photos look more interesting.  
Use the available camera effects to make your photos  
look as if they’ve been taken through special lenses  
and filters. You can also apply effects to videos.  
Take periodic breaks in viewing to prevent these symptoms  
or any impairment of vision.  
Choose an effect before taking a photo or video.  
To prevent injury, do not operate a motor vehicle or engage  
in other hazardous activities if you are experiencing any  
dizziness or visual impairment.  
1. Tap  
.
2. Scroll through the available effects and tap one  
that you like.  
To avoid damage to developing eyes, do not allow children  
under 7 to use 3D function.  
When you choose certain photo effects such as depth  
of field, distortion, or vignette, drag the bar that appears  
on the right side of the screen to adjust the intensity of  
the effect.  
• Discuss specific concerns with your optometrist,  
ophthalmologist, or physician.  
Using the Front Camera  
Take a picture or shoot a video of yourself using the  
front camera.  
Taking Pictures  
1. Press  
and tap  
> Camera.  
To switch to the front camera, on the camera screen,  
2. Before taking the photo, you can:  
Zoom in on your subject.  
tap  
tap  
or  
or  
. To switch back to the main camera,   
again.  
Note: Some camera features are not available when you’re  
using the front camera, such as auto focusing,  
zooming, flash, face detection, and HD 720P recording.  
133  
     
Tap the flash button repeatedly to select a flash  
mode depending on your lighting conditions:  
Camera Flash FAQ  
Why doesn’t the camera flash turn on?  
Auto flash  
Flash on  
Flash off  
The flash light quickly consumes battery power. To  
save battery power, the camera disables the flash light  
or locks it to Flash off mode (even when you have set it  
to Auto flash or Flash on) when one of the following  
occurs:  
Press  
and choose the resolution and other  
camera settings you want to use.  
You have an incoming call. If you have set the flash  
light to Flash on, it turns back on after you answer  
and end the call.  
Choose an effect to apply to your photo.  
Slide the 2D/3D switch to 3D if you want to  
capture the photo in 3D.  
Your device’s battery power is running low. Recharge  
the battery so that the camera can have enough  
battery power to use the flash light.  
3. Point the camera and focus on your subject.  
If you’re taking pictures of people, the camera will  
automatically recognize faces and adjust the focus.  
You’ll see recognition boxes around people’s  
faces.  
Cold weather lowers battery performance and affects  
the flash light. To make sure the camera has enough  
battery life to power up the flash light, keep your device  
warm. When not in use, put the device inside your  
jacket to keep it warm, and try to avoid sudden  
temperature changes that may affect battery  
performance.  
Note: You can turn off the Auto focus and Face detection  
features in the camera settings.  
4. When you’re ready to take the photo, tap  
.
5. Choose what you want to do with the photo you’ve  
134  
   
Recording Video  
Review Screen  
1. Press  
and tap  
> Camcorder.  
After capturing a photo or video, the review screen will  
display the photo or the starting image of the video that  
you have just captured.  
2. Press  
and tap Video quality.  
To record video in HD, set Video quality to HD 720P  
(1280 x 720). Or for sharing on the Web, select  
Online (HD, 10 minutes).  
3. Choose an effect to apply to your video.  
4. Slide the 2D/3D switch to 3D if you want to record  
the video in 3D.  
5. Frame your subject on the viewfinder screen.  
6. Tap  
to start recording.  
7. While recording video, you can:  
Tap the zoom bar to freely zoom in or out.  
Review screen after taking a photo  
Change the focus to a different subject or area by  
tapping an area on the screen.  
Tap the onscreen buttons to choose what you want to  
do next.  
Tap the flash button to switch the camera light   
Delete the photo or video.  
on (  
) or off (  
) during recording.  
Send the photo or video to another phone or  
your computer using Bluetooth, send it by email,  
or select a social network where you want to  
upload it to.  
8. To stop recording, tap  
again.  
9. Choose what you want to do with the video you’ve  
just recorded. See “Review Screen” for details.  
135  
     
Set as Choose how you want to use the photo,  
such as using it as your wallpaper.  
White balance: Lets you change the white balance  
to enable the camera to capture colors more  
accurately by adjusting to your current lighting  
environment.  
Watch the video.  
or Return to the viewfinder screen.  
ISO (photo mode only): Lets you choose an ISO  
level or set it back to Auto. Higher ISO numbers  
are better for taking pictures in low light  
conditions.  
Changing Camera Settings  
Open the menu panel to access and change camera  
settings.  
Resolution/Video quality: Lets you select a photo  
or video resolution to use.  
Note: You can turn off the Auto focus and Face detection  
features in the camera settings.  
Review duration: Lets you set the time for a  
captured photo or video to be displayed on the  
review screen before the camera changes back to  
the viewfinder screen.  
To open the camera settings, press  
while on the  
Viewfinder screen. You can change the following  
settings:  
File format (3D photo/video mode only): Lets you  
select the file format for 3D photos and videos.  
Selecting the correct file format makes sure that  
the 3D photo or video will display correctly on  
another device that supports the format.  
Self-timer (photo mode only): Lets you set a time  
delay before your camera automatically takes the  
photo.  
Image adjustments Slide your finger across each  
slider bar to adjust the exposure, contrast,  
saturation, and sharpness.  
Stereo recording (video mode only): Select to  
record sound in stereo when capturing videos.  
Record with audio (video mode only): Lets you  
choose whether to record audio when capturing  
videos.  
136  
   
Widescreen (photo mode only): When selected  
(default), photo resolutions available are in 5:3  
ratio and you can use the entire Viewfinder  
screen to frame your subject. When not selected,  
photo resolutions available for selection are in  
standard 4:3 ratio.  
Grid (photo mode only): Allows you to display a  
grid on the viewfinder screen so you can easily  
frame and center your subject before taking the  
photo.  
Reset to default: Lets you change the camera  
settings back to default.  
Geo-tag photos (photo mode only): Lets you store  
the GPS location in your captured photos.  
Closing Camera  
Auto enhance (photo mode only): Select to reduce  
noise when using a high ISO setting and to  
automatically adjust photo brightness.  
On the viewfinder screen, press  
or  
.
Auto focus: Enables or disables centered  
autofocus. Autofocus is enabled by default.  
Face detection (photo mode only): Allows the  
camera to recognize faces and adjust the focus  
when you take pictures of people. Face detection  
will be turned off if you disable auto focus.  
Shutter sound: Allows you to select whether the  
camera plays a shutter sound when you press the  
shutter release.  
137  
 
Folders on your storage card that contain photos and  
videos will also be treated as albums and will be listed  
below the preset albums. The actual folder names will  
be used as the album names.  
Viewing Pictures and Videos Using  
Gallery  
Relive the fun while viewing photos and videos of your  
latest travels or your pet’s newest tricks. Get an  
audience by tagging your Facebook and Flickr friends.  
You can even play your media on a TV screen or print  
your photos right from your device.  
Important: To start using Gallery, make sure you have photos  
or videos copied on your storage card.  
You can edit and add effects to photos stored on your  
microSD card. You can also easily use a photo as your  
contact icon, location icon, or wallpaper.  
Selecting an Album  
Press  
and tap  
> Gallery.  
All your photos and videos are organized by albums for  
easy viewing.  
Camera shots lets you view photos and videos that  
are stored in the camera’s folder.  
138  
       
3D photos & videos lets you view all 3D photos and  
videos that are stored in all the folders on the storage  
card. 3D photos and videos in an album are marked  
Viewing Photos and Videos  
After selecting an album from the Albums screen, you  
can browse through the photos and videos of that  
album. Tap a photo or video to view it in full screen.  
with the 3D icon (  
).  
All photos lets you view all photos that are stored in  
all the folders on the storage card.  
All videos lets you view all videos that are stored in all  
the folders on the storage card.  
Photos and videos that you set as your favorites will  
be grouped under My favorites.  
If you have downloaded any photos and videos,  
these will be placed in the All downloads album.  
Photos or videos that are under the root path of your  
storage card (that are not contained in folders) are  
grouped in Others.  
When viewing pictures in Gallery, scroll up the screen  
to view more albums. Simply tap an album to view the  
photos or videos in that album.  
Note: Depending on the number of pictures stored on the  
microSD card, it may take some time for Gallery to load  
all your photos on the screen.  
139  
Watching Videos  
Video is always displayed in landscape mode when  
you play it.  
Notes: You can press and hold on a photo or video to open  
a selection menu and choose what to do with the  
photo or video.  
If you want to select another album, tap  
to the Albums screen.  
to return  
While browsing an album, tap a video to play it.  
Zooming In or Out on a Photo  
There are two ways you can zoom in or out of a photo:  
Tap the screen twice quickly to zoom in, and then  
tap the screen twice quickly again to zoom out.  
– or –  
Press your thumb and index finger on the screen  
and then spread your fingers apart to zoom in;  
pinch your fingers together to zoom out. (See  
Use the onscreen controls to play, pause, or stop  
the video.  
For an enhanced audio experience, tap  
to  
turn on SRS (not available when you’re using a  
Bluetooth headset).  
Tap  
to toggle between full and best-fit screens.  
140  
You can play these high-definition MP4 video formats  
in Gallery:  
You can view photos in your online albums the same  
way you view photos on your storage card.  
H.263 profile 0 @ 30 fps, WVGA (800x480), max  
2 Mbps  
Viewing Photos on Flickr  
You need to be logged in to your Flickr account to view  
Flickr photos.  
MPEG-4 simple profile @ 30 fps, 720p  
(1280x720), max 6 Mbps  
1. Press  
and tap  
> Gallery.  
H.264 baseline profile @ 30 fps, 720p (1280x720),  
max 6 Mbps  
2. Tap Albums and tap Flickr.  
You may be asked to give authorization for the  
application to connect to the Flickr website. If this  
happens, you need to give authorization to access  
your Flickr account.  
Viewing Photos in Your Social Networks  
Right in Gallery, check what you and your friends have  
uploaded to your social networks (Facebook and Flickr  
only).  
3. Tap your account name or your friend’s account  
on the list to view the photos in the account.  
Viewing Photos on Facebook  
You can view photos in your online albums the same  
way you view photos on your storage card.  
You need to be logged in to your Facebook account to  
view Facebook photos.  
1. Press  
and tap  
> Gallery.  
2. Tap Albums and tap Facebook.  
3. Tap your account name or your friend’s account  
on the list to view the photos in the account.  
141  
 
Commenting on Photos in Your Social Networks  
Editing Your Photos  
Add comments to your uploaded photos as well as  
your friends’ photos.  
Do basic editing tasks on your photos such as rotation  
and cropping. You can also enhance your photos by  
applying effects such as high contrast, vintage  
appearance, and more.  
1. Do one of the following:  
While browsing online albums, press and hold a  
photo and then tap Add comment.  
Rotating a Photo  
While viewing a photo in full screen, tap anywhere  
1. Press  
and tap  
> Gallery.  
on the screen, and then tap  
.
2. Tap an album.  
2. Tap the box that says “Write a comment.”  
3. Press and hold on the photo that you want to rotate  
and then tap Edit.  
3. Enter your text, and then tap Comment.  
4. In the menu that opens, select either Rotate right or  
Rotate left.  
Tip: You can also rotate a photo while you’re viewing it  
fullscreen. Tap the screen, tap  
and then select either  
Rotate right or Rotate left.  
Cropping a Photo  
1. Press  
and tap  
> Gallery.  
2. Tap an album.  
142  
 
3. Press and hold on the photo that you want to crop  
The cropped photo is saved on the storage card as a  
copy. The original photo remains unedited.  
and then tap Edit .  
4. In the menu that opens, tap Crop. You’ll see a crop  
Tip: You can also crop a photo while viewing it fullscreen.  
Tap the screen, tap  
instructions above.  
> Crop, and follow the  
box around the photo.  
Adding Effects  
1. Press  
and tap  
> Gallery.  
2. Tap an album.  
3. Press and hold on the photo that you want to add  
effects to, and then tap Edit.  
4. In the menu that opens, tap Effects. On the panel  
that opens, you’ll see options available to you.  
5. Tap an effect to apply on the photo.  
5. To adjust the crop box size, press and hold the  
edge of the box. When directional arrows appear,  
drag your finger inward to or outward to resize the  
crop box.  
6. Tap Save to keep the changes.  
The enhanced photo is saved in the storage card as a  
copy. The original photo remains unedited.  
6. To move the crop box to the part of the photo that  
you want to crop, drag the crop box to the desired  
position.  
Tip: You can also add an effect to a photo while viewing it  
fullscreen. Tap the screen, tap  
the instructions above.  
> Effects, and follow  
7. Tap Save to apply the changes to the picture.  
143  
Printing Your Photos  
Connect your device to a supported printer and print  
out your photos.  
Tip: Tap Advanced to set the page size, print layout, and  
page orientation, and choose if you want to print in color  
or black-and-white.  
6. Tap Print.  
Notes: Both printer and your device must be turned on and  
connected to the same local network. To learn how to  
connect the device to the local wireless network, see  
Network” on page 179. To learn how to connect the  
printer to the local network, refer to your printer user  
guide.  
You can check the printing progress by opening the  
Notifications panel and then tapping the item you’re  
printing.  
Sending Your Photos and Videos  
Send photos and videos via email or MMS or to  
another device or your computer using Bluetooth.  
The local network must not be behind a firewall.  
1. Press  
and tap  
> Gallery.  
Sending Photos or Videos by Email  
2. Tap an album.  
You can send photos, videos, or both in an email  
message. They are added as file attachments in your  
email.  
3. Press and hold on the photo that you want to print  
and then tap Print. Your device automatically scans  
for the printer.  
1. Press  
and tap  
> Gallery.  
4. If the printer appears on the list, tap it. Otherwise,  
tap Scan for printers or Add printer and then follow  
onscreen instructions to add the printer to the list.  
2. Tap the album that contains the photos or videos  
you want to share.  
3. Tap  
and then tap Gmail or Mail.  
5. In the Print preview screen, you can set the  
number of copies or select to fit the photo on the  
page.  
144  
 
4. Select the photos or videos you want to share and  
Sending Photos or Videos Using Bluetooth  
then tap Next.  
You can select photos, videos, or both and send them  
to another phone or to a computer using Bluetooth.  
5. Compose your message and then tap Send.  
Note: If you selected Mail and you have multiple email  
1. Press  
and tap  
> Gallery.  
accounts, the default email account will be used.  
2. Tap the album that contains the photos or videos  
you want to share.  
Sending a Photo or Video by MMS (Multimedia  
Messaging)  
3. Tap  
and then tap Bluetooth.  
Although you can send several photos or videos in a  
multimedia message, it may be better to just send one  
at a time, especially if the files are large in size.  
4. Select the photos or videos you want to share and  
then tap Next.  
In the next few steps, you’ll be asked to turn on  
Bluetooth on your device and connect to the receiving  
Bluetooth device so the files can be sent. For more  
1. Press  
and tap  
> Gallery.  
2. Tap the album that contains the photos or videos  
you want to share.  
3. Tap  
and then tap Messages.  
4. Tap the photo or video you want to send. The  
photo or video is automatically added into the  
multimedia message.  
5. Compose your message and then tap Send.  
145  
5. Do the following:  
Sharing Your Photos and Videos on the  
Web  
Using Gallery, you can share photos and videos on  
your social networks, as well as post videos on  
YouTube.  
In Upload photos to tap the Facebook album  
where you want to upload the photos. You can  
also create a new Facebook photo album by  
tapping Create album.  
If you’ve created a new Facebook album on the  
device or if you’re uploading a video, tap the box  
under Who can see this album / Who can see this  
videos and then tap the people who can view the  
uploaded photos and videos.  
You can also use the Camera or Camcorder to share a  
photo or video right after you’ve captured it.  
Sharing Photos and Videos on Facebook  
You need to be logged in to your Facebook account to  
upload photos.  
6. Tap Add tag and description, and then do any of the  
following:  
1. Press  
and tap  
> Gallery.  
Tap the caption box and enter the photo caption.  
For videos, enter a different title and description  
for each video.  
2. Tap the album that contains the photos and videos  
you want to share.  
To tag friends on your photo, Tag this photo and  
then tap the part where your friend is. From the list  
that shows, select who you want to tag, and then  
tap Save.  
3. Tap  
and then tap Facebook for HTC Sense.  
4. Select the photos you want to share and then tap  
Next.  
Slide to the left to go to the next photo or video.  
7. Tap Upload, and then tap Done.  
146  
4. Select the photos or videos you want to share and  
Sharing a Photo on Facebook for Android  
then tap Next.  
You need to be logged in to your Facebook account to  
upload photos. When using Facebook for Android, you  
can only upload one photo at a time.  
5. Do the following:  
In Upload photos to tap the Facebook album  
where you want to upload the photos. You can  
also create a new Facebook photo album by  
tapping Create album.  
1. Press  
and tap  
> Gallery.  
2. Tap the album that contains the photo you want to  
share.  
If you’ve created a new Facebook album on the  
device or if you’re uploading a video, tap the box  
under Who can see this album / Who can see this  
videos and then tap the people who can view the  
uploaded photos and videos.  
3. Tap  
and then tap Facebook.  
4. Select the photo you want to share and then tap  
Next.  
5. Add a caption for the photo and then tap Upload.  
6. Tap Add tag and description, and then do any of the  
following:  
6. Check the status bar for the upload information.  
Enter a different title and description for each  
photo or video.  
Sharing Photos and Videos on Flickr  
You need to be logged in to your Flickr account to  
upload photos and videos.  
To tag friends on your photo, Tag this photo and  
then tap the part where your friend is. From the list  
that shows, select who you want to tag, and then  
tap Save.  
1. Press  
and tap  
> Gallery.  
2. Tap the album that contains the photos or videos  
you want to share.  
7. Slide to the left to go to the next photo or video.  
3. Tap  
and then tap Flickr.  
8. Tap Upload, and then tap Done.  
147  
Sharing Videos on YouTube  
Note: If you are not logged in to your Flickr account, you will  
be prompted to log in and download the HTC Flickr  
Downloader application. Follow the onscreen  
instructions to proceed.  
You can share your videos by uploading them to  
YouTube™. Before you do this, you must create a  
YouTube account and sign in to that account on your  
device.  
Sharing Photos on Picasa  
1. Press  
and tap  
> Gallery.  
You need to be signed in to a Google Account to be  
able to upload pictures to the Picasa™ photo  
organizing service.  
2. Tap the album that contains the videos you want to  
share.  
1. Press  
and tap  
> Gallery.  
3. Tap  
and then tap YouTube.  
2. Tap the album that contains the photos or videos  
4. Select the videos you want to share and then tap  
Next. Sign in to your YouTube or Google Account, if  
you’re asked to do so.  
you want to share.  
3. Tap  
and then tap Picasa.  
5. Enter a title for the videos you’re uploading.  
4. Select the photos you want to share and then tap  
Next.  
6. Tap More details where you can enter information  
such as description and tags, and select a privacy  
option.  
5. Select the online album where you want to upload  
the photos, or tap  
to create a new album.  
7. Tap Upload.  
6. Tap Upload.  
picasaweb.google.com.  
Closing Gallery  
While in the Gallery screen, press  
application.  
to close the  
148  
4. Before you stream live video:  
Sharing Live Videos with Qik  
Tap  
to set the video as private or public.  
Use Qik to share live videos, start a video call with a  
contact, and more. Before you start streaming live  
videos in Qik, you must create and sign in to your Qik  
account. To create a Qik account, visit qik.com and click  
Sign Up.  
Tap  
video with.  
to select the contact you want to share the  
5. When you’re ready to share your video, tap Record.  
6. When you’re done sharing your video, tap Stop.  
7. On the subsequent screen, you can:  
Enter a title for the video you’ve just shared.  
Sharing a Live Video in Qik  
1. Press  
and tap  
> Qik.  
Tap  
to set the privacy settings, or  
to delete  
the video.  
2. Tap Log in and then log in to your Qik account.  
Tap any of the sharing options to share the  
recorded video through Facebook, YouTube,  
email, and more.  
Note: The first time you open Qik, you will be asked to update  
the application. Follow screen instructions to download  
and install the latest version in Android Market. For  
more information about the Android Market, see  
8. Tap Done.  
Closing Qik  
3. On the Qik Video screen, tap Record & Share.  
On the video capture screen, press  
to return to the  
Qik welcome screen, press , and then tap Exit.  
149  
     
Using Bluetooth  
2I. Bluetooth  
Turning Bluetooth On or Off  
1. Press  
>
, and then tap Settings >   
Wireless & networks.  
2. Select or clear the Bluetooth check box.  
An even easier way to turn Bluetooth on or off is with  
the Bluetooth widget on the Home screen. For  
instructions on adding a widget to the Home screen,  
Note: Turn off Bluetooth when not in use to conserve battery  
power, or in places where using a wireless device is  
prohibited, such as aboard an aircraft and in hospitals.  
150  
           
Changing the Device Name  
The device name identifies your device to other  
devices.  
Important: For you to listen to music with your headset or car  
kit, the headset or car kit must support the A2DP  
Bluetooth profile.  
Before you connect your headset, you need to  
make it discoverable so your device can find it.  
You can find out how to do this by referring to  
your headset manual.  
1. Press  
>
, and then tap Settings >   
Wireless & networks.  
2. Tap Bluetooth settings.  
3. If the Bluetooth check box is not selected, select it  
1. Press  
>
, and then tap Settings >   
to turn Bluetooth on.  
Wireless & networks > Bluetooth settings.  
4. Tap Device name.  
2. If the Bluetooth check box is not selected, select it  
to turn Bluetooth on.  
5. Enter the name for your device in the dialog box,  
and then tap OK.  
3. Make sure that the headset is discoverable.  
Connecting a Bluetooth Headset or Car Kit  
4. Tap Scan for devices. Your device will start to scan  
for Bluetooth devices within range.  
You can listen to music over a Bluetooth stereo  
headset, or have hands-free conversations using a  
compatible Bluetooth headset or car kit. Use the same  
procedure to set up stereo audio or hands-free devices.  
5. When you see the name of your headset displayed  
in the Bluetooth devices section, tap the name.   
Your device then automatically tries to pair with the  
headset.  
6. If automatic pairing fails, enter the passcode  
supplied with your headset.  
151  
       
The pairing and connection status is displayed below  
the hands-free headset or car kit name in the Bluetooth  
devices section. When the Bluetooth headset or car kit  
is connected to your device, the Bluetooth connected  
Reconnecting a Headset or Car Kit  
When you have paired a headset with your device, you  
should be able to reconnect it automatically by turning  
on Bluetooth on your device and then turning on the  
headset. However, might have to connect manually if  
your headset has been used with another Bluetooth  
device.  
icon  
is displayed in the status bar. Depending on  
the type of headset or car kit you have connected, you  
can then start using the headset or car kit to listen to  
music and to make and or receive phone calls.  
1. Press  
>
, and then tap Settings >   
Note: Due to different specifications and features of other  
Bluetooth-compatible devices, display and operations  
may be different, and functions such as transfer or  
exchange may not be possible with all Bluetooth-  
compatible devices.  
Wireless & networks > Bluetooth settings.  
2. If the Bluetooth check box is not selected, select it  
to turn Bluetooth on.  
3. Make sure that the headset is discoverable.  
4. Tap the headset’s name in the Bluetooth devices  
section.  
5. If prompted to enter a passcode, try 0000 or 1234,  
or consult the headset or car kit documentation to  
find the passcode.  
If you still cannot reconnect to the headset or car kit,  
follow the instructions in “Disconnecting or Unpairing  
From a Bluetooth Device” in this section, and then  
Car Kit.”  
152  
 
Disconnecting or Unpairing From a  
Bluetooth Device  
Sending Information Using Bluetooth  
You can use Bluetooth to transfer information between  
your device and another Bluetooth-enabled device  
such as a phone or notebook computer. The first time  
you transfer information between your device and  
another device, you need to enter or confirm a security  
passcode. After that, your device and the other device  
are paired, and you will not need to exchange  
To disconnect a Bluetooth device:  
1. Press  
>
, and then tap Settings >   
Wireless & networks > Bluetooth settings.  
2. In the Bluetooth devices section, press and hold  
the device to disconnect.  
passcodes to transfer information in the future.  
3. Tap Disconnect.  
You can send the following types of information,  
depending on the device you are sending to:  
To unpair from a Bluetooth device:  
Images and videos  
Calendar events  
Contacts  
You can make your device forget its pairing connection  
with another Bluetooth device. To connect to the other  
device again, you may need to enter or confirm a  
passcode again.  
Audio files  
1. Press  
>
, and then tap Settings >   
Important: Before you begin, set the receiving device to  
discoverable mode. You may also need to set it to  
“Receive Beams” or “Receive Files.” Refer to the  
device’s documentation for instructions on  
Wireless & networks > Bluetooth settings.  
2. In the Bluetooth devices section, press and hold  
the device to unpair.  
receiving information over Bluetooth.  
3. Tap Disconnect & unpair, or tap Unpair if the  
Bluetooth device is currently not connected to your  
device.  
1. On the device, open the application that contains  
the information or file you want to send.  
153  
     
2. Follow the steps for the type of item you want to  
3. If you are prompted to turn on Bluetooth, tap Yes.  
send:  
4. If you haven’t paired with the receiving device  
before, tap Scan for devices.  
Photo or video (in Camera). After capturing a  
photo, on the preview screen, tap the Share  
5. Tap the name of the receiving device.  
button  
Photos and videos (in Gallery). On the Albums  
screen, tap an album. Tap , tap Bluetooth,  
, and then tap Bluetooth.  
6. If prompted, accept the pairing request on your  
device and the receiving device. Also enter the  
same passcode on both your device and the other  
device or confirm the auto-generated passcode.  
select the items you want to share, and then tap  
Next.  
7. On the receiving device, accept the file.  
Calendar event. In the Calendar’s Day view or  
Week view, press and hold the event, and then  
tap Share vCalendar > Bluetooth. In Agenda view,  
press and hold the event, and then tap Forward >  
Bluetooth.  
Where Sent Information is Saved  
When you send information from your device using  
Bluetooth, the location where it’s saved depends on the  
type of information and the receiving device.  
Contact. On the All screen of the People  
application, press and hold the contact, and then  
tap Send contact as vCard. Tap the down arrow  
icon, and then select Bluetooth from the displayed  
list. Tap Send.  
If you send a calendar event or contact, it is normally  
added directly to the corresponding application on the  
receiving device. For example, if you send a calendar  
event to a compatible phone, the event is shown in that  
phone’s calendar application.  
Music track. With the track displayed on the Now  
playing screen, press  
Share > Bluetooth.  
, and then tap More >  
If you send another file type to a Windows computer, it  
is normally saved in the Bluetooth Exchange folder  
within your personal document folders.  
Voice recording. On the main Voice Recorder  
screen, tap  
, and then tap Bluetooth.  
154  
On Windows XP, the path may be:  
C:\Documents and Settings\[your username]\  
My Documents\Bluetooth Exchange  
After that, your device and the other device are paired,  
and you will not need to exchange passcodes to  
transfer information in the future.  
On Windows Vista, the path may be:  
C:\Users\[your username]\Documents  
1. Press  
>
, and then tap Settings >   
Wireless & networks > Bluetooth settings.  
On Windows 7, the path may be:  
C:\Users\[your username]\My Documents\  
Bluetooth Exchange Folder  
2. If the Bluetooth check box is not selected, select it  
to turn Bluetooth on.  
3. Select the Discoverable check box.  
If you send a file to another device, the saved location  
may depend on the file type. For example, if you send  
an image file to another wireless phone, it may be  
saved in a folder named “Images.”  
4. On the sending device, send one or more files to  
your device. Refer to the device’s documentation  
for instructions on sending information over  
Bluetooth.  
Receiving Information From Another Device  
5. If asked, accept the pairing request on your device  
and the receiving device.  
Your device is capable of receiving a wide variety of file  
types with Bluetooth, including photos, music tracks,  
and documents such as PDFs.  
Also enter the same passcode on both your device  
and the other device, or confirm the auto-  
generated passcode.  
To receive files from another device, you need to have  
a microSD card installed on your device.  
A Bluetooth authorization request is then displayed  
on your device.  
The first time you transfer information between your  
device and another device, you need to enter or  
confirm a security passcode.  
6. If you want to automatically receive files from the  
sending device in future, select the Always check  
box.  
155  
7. Tap Accept or OK.  
Adding the Bluetooth Received Folder to  
the Home Screen  
You can add a folder to your device’s screen that  
shows all files you have received with Bluetooth.  
8. When your device receives a file transfer request  
notification, slide down the Notifications panel, and  
then tap Accept.  
9. When a file is transferred, a notification is  
displayed. To open the file immediately, slide down  
the Notifications panel, and then tap the relevant  
notification.  
1. Press  
and tap  
> Folder > Bluetooth received.  
2. Press and hold the Bluetooth received folder icon,  
and drag it to the Home screen position you want.  
When you open a received file, what happens next  
depends on the file type:  
To view the folder contents, tap the folder icon. To open  
a file, tap the file name.  
Media files and documents are usually opened  
directly in a compatible application. For example,  
if you open a music track, it starts playing in the  
Music application.  
For a vCalendar file, select the calendar where  
you want to save the event, and then tap Import.   
The vCalendar is added to your Calendar events.  
(For more information on using Calendar, see  
For a vCard contact file, if there are multiple vCard  
files on your microSD card, you can choose to  
import one, several, or all of those contacts to  
your contacts list.  
156  
 
4. When the other device attempts to access your  
device’s microSD card, a Bluetooth Authorization  
Request appears on the screen. Tap Accept. If you  
want to allow the connecting device to always  
access your device’s microSD card, select the  
Always check box before you tap Accept. The  
microSD card contents appear on the other  
device’s screen.  
Using Bluetooth FTP Server  
Bluetooth FTP Server allows other devices with  
Bluetooth FTP profiles to view, access, copy, and delete  
files from your device’s microSD card.  
Turn on the Blueooth FTP Server on your device and  
allow access to the microSD card contents.  
Note: To use Bluetooth FTP Server, you need to have a  
microSD card installed in your device.  
1. Press  
>
, and then tap Settings >   
Wireless & networks > Bluetooth settings >   
Advanced Settings.  
2. Select the FTP Server check box.  
3. Pair your device with the other Bluetooth device  
that you will allow access to your microSD card  
contents.   
For more information about Bluetooth pairing, see  
157  
 
Section 3  
Sprint Service  
   
Voicemail  
3A. Sprint Service:  
The Basics  
Setting Up Your Voicemail  
Your device automatically transfers all unanswered calls  
to your voicemail, even if your device is in use or turned  
off. You should set up your Sprint Voicemail and personal  
greeting as soon as your device is activated. Always use  
a password to protect against unauthorized access.  
1. Press  
and tap  
> Voicemail.  
2. In the Personalize your voicemail window, tap  
Personalize now.  
3. Your device will automatically connect with Sprint  
voicemail service. Follow the system prompts to:  
Create your password.  
Record your name announcement.  
Record your greeting.  
Note: Voicemail Password  
Sprint strongly recommends that you create a  
password when setting up your voicemail to protect  
against unauthorized access. Without a password,  
anyone who has access to your device is able to  
access your voicemail messages.  
160  
         
Voicemail Notification  
Retrieving Your Voicemail Messages  
There are several ways your device alerts you to a new  
message:  
You can review your messages directly from your  
wireless device or from any other touch-tone phone.  
By sounding the assigned ringer type.  
Using Your Device  
By displaying  
at the top of your screen.  
1. Press  
and tap  
> Voicemail.  
By flashing the notification LED (if enabled).  
2. Tap a message to listen to it.  
New Voicemail Message Alerts  
When you receive a new voice message, you will see a  
message in the Notification panel (see “Notifications  
Using Another Phone to Access Messages  
1. Dial your wireless phone number.  
2. When your voicemail answers, tap  
.
Notes: When you are roaming off the Nationwide Sprint  
Network, you may not receive notification of new  
voicemail messages. Sprint recommends that you  
periodically check your voicemail by dialing your area  
code + your wireless phone number. When your  
3. Enter your passcode.  
Tip: When you call voicemail from another phone, you first  
hear the header information (date, time, and sender  
information) for the message. To skip directly to the  
voicemail answers, press  
and enter your  
message, tap  
during the header.  
passcode. Roaming rates apply when you access  
voicemail while roaming off the Nationwide Sprint  
Network.  
Clearing the Message Icon  
Your device accepts messages even when it is turned  
off. However, your device notifies you of new  
messages only when it is turned on and you are in a  
Sprint service area.  
Your device may temporarily continue to display the  
message icon after you have checked your voice and  
text messages.  
161  
     
Panel” on page 16) and tap Clear notifications.  
Text Messaging (SMS) and  
Multimedia Messaging (MMS)  
Voicemail Key Guide  
Keep in touch with important people in your life. Use  
the Messages application to compose and send text  
(SMS) and multimedia messages (MMS). MMS can  
contain text and pictures, recorded voice, audio or  
video files, picture slideshows, contact cards (vCard), or  
appointments (vCalendar).  
Here’s a quick guide to your keypad functions while  
listening to voicemail messages.  
Date/Time  
Replay  
Erase  
Send Reply  
Rewind  
Advance  
Forward  
Save  
Note: See your service plan for applicable charges for   
Text Messaging and SMS Voice Messaging.  
Opening Messages  
Return Call  
Help  
Press  
and tap  
> Messages.  
The All messages screen opens, where all your  
sent and received messages are neatly grouped  
into conversations, by contact name or phone  
number.  
Cancel  
Skip  
Scroll up or down the list of conversations by  
swiping your finger on the screen.  
Tap a contact name or number to view the  
exchange of messages.  
162  
         
Sending Text Messages (SMS)  
Notes: There is a limit on the number of characters for a  
single text message (displayed above the Send  
button). If you exceed the limit, your text message will  
be delivered as one but will be billed as more than  
one message.  
1. Press  
and tap  
> Messages.  
2. Tap  
.
3. Fill in one or more recipients. You can:  
Your text message automatically becomes a  
multimedia message if you enter an email address as  
the recipient, add a message subject, attach an item,  
or compose a very long message.  
Enter the first few letters of a contact name or  
starting digits of a mobile number. As you type,  
matching names with phone numbers from your  
stored contacts are displayed. Tap a name or one  
of the contact’s numbers.  
5. Tap Send, or press  
to save message as a draft.  
Tap  
, and then select the phone numbers of  
the contacts to whom you want to send the  
message. You can also select contact groups as  
recipients. When you have selected all the  
message recipients, tap Done.  
Preset Messages  
Preset messages make it easy to compose text  
messages.  
Enter the complete phone numbers directly in the  
To field.  
To add or edit preset messages:  
1. Press  
and tap  
> Messages.  
4. Tap the “Add text” box and then enter your  
2. Tap  
.
message.  
163  
   
3. Fill in one or more recipients. You can:  
To delete preset messages, press  
Delete. Tap the messages you want to delete, and  
then tap Delete.  
and tap  
Enter the first few letters of a contact name or  
starting digits of a mobile number. As you type,  
matching names with phone numbers from your  
stored contacts are displayed. Tap a name or one  
of the contact’s numbers.  
Sending a Multimedia Message (MMS)  
1. Press  
and tap  
> Messages.  
Tap  
, and then select the phone numbers of  
2. Tap  
.
the contacts to whom you want to send the  
message. You can also select contact groups as  
recipients. When you have selected all the  
message recipients, tap Done.  
3. Fill in one or more recipients. You can either:  
Enter the first few letters of a contact name or  
starting digits of a mobile number. As you type,  
matching names with phone numbers and email  
addresses from your stored contacts are  
displayed. Tap a contact’s number or email  
address. Email addresses will be displayed when  
Show email address is selected in Recipient list  
settings.  
Enter the complete phone numbers directly in the  
To field.  
4. Tap the “Add text” box, press  
and tap Quick  
text. (You will see the list of preset messages.)  
5. Do any of the following:  
Tap  
, and then select the phone numbers of  
Tap a preset message to enter it to your text  
the contacts to whom you want to send the  
message. You can also select contact groups as  
recipients. When you have selected all the  
message recipients, tap Done.  
message.  
To add a new message, press  
Enter your message and tap OK.  
and tap Insert.  
To edit a preset message, press  
Tap the message you want to edit, edit the  
message, and then tap OK.  
and tap Edit.  
Enter the complete phone numbers or email  
address directly in the To field.  
164  
4. To add a subject line, press  
and then tap Add  
Location. Add your current location (requires GPS  
to be turned on), or a location you pick on a map  
to your message. (See “Google Maps” on page  
252 for more details.)  
subject.  
5. Tap the “Add text” box, and then compose your  
message.  
Contact (vCard). Select a contact from your  
device, and then select which contact information  
you want to attach.  
6. Tap  
and then select the type of attachment:  
Picture. Select Camera to take a photo and attach  
it, or Gallery to attach a photo from your microSD  
card.  
Appointment (vCalendar). Select the calendar  
event you want to attach.  
Video. Select Camcorder to capture a video and  
attach it, or Videos to attach a video from your  
microSD card.  
7. To see options for replacing or reviewing your  
attachment, tap  
. You can also press  
, and  
then tap Discard to start over.  
Audio. Select Voice Recorder to make a voice  
recording and attach it, or Music & sounds to  
attach a music file or voice recording from your  
microSD card.  
8. Tap Send, or press  
to save message as a draft.  
Creating a Slideshow  
1. After you’ve added either a photo, video, or audio  
App recommendation. Choose an app you’ve  
installed from Android Market that you want to  
share with others. The URL from which the app  
can be downloaded will be inserted to your  
message.  
in the multimedia message you’re composing,   
tap  
> Slideshow.  
2. Do any of the following:  
Add a slide. Tap  
, and then choose to add a  
photo or a video.  
Add music or a voice recording to a slide. Right  
after adding a slide, tap  
> Audio.  
165  
Add a caption to a slide. Tap “Add text” box.  
Edit a slide. Tap , and then choose to replace,  
remove, or set the duration of the slide.  
Viewing and Replying to a Message  
Depending on your notification settings, the device  
plays a ring tone, vibrates, or displays the message  
briefly in the status bar when you receive a new text or  
multimedia message. To change the notification for  
new text and multimedia messages, see “Setting Text  
Preview the slideshow. Press , and then tap More >  
Preview. Tap once on the preview screen to see  
playback controls.  
3. Tap Send, or press  
to save message as a draft.  
Saving and Resuming a Draft Message  
While composing a text or multimedia message,   
press  
draft.  
to automatically save your message as a  
To resume composing the message:  
A new message icon (  
bar to notify you of a new text or multimedia message.  
) also appears in the status  
1. On the All messages screen, press  
tap Drafts.  
, and then  
1. To open and read the message, you can:  
2. Tap the message and then resume editing it.  
Press and hold the status bar, and then slide  
down to open the Notifications panel. Tap the new  
message to open and read it.  
3. When you finish editing the message, tap Send.  
Press  
and tap  
> Messages.  
166  
2. While reading the message, you can:  
Check message details. Tap the message (do not  
tap a link or a phone number) to open the options  
menu, and then tap View message details.  
Reply with a text message. Tap the “Add text” box,  
enter your reply message, and then tap Send.  
Reply with a multimedia message. Tap the “Add  
Replying to Another Phone Number of the  
Contact  
When a contact has multiple phone numbers stored on  
your device, you’ll see the particular phone number  
used within the message. There’s also a bold letter  
before the phone number to indicate the number type  
(for example, M stands for Mobile).  
text” box, enter your reply message, tap  
to  
choose an attachment for your message, and  
then tap Send.  
Call or save a phone number contained in the  
message. Tap the phone number, and then  
choose whether to dial the number or add it to  
your contacts.  
Open a link in the message. Tap the link to open it  
in the Web browser.  
Send to or save an email address contained in the  
message. Tap the email address. Then choose  
whether to send an email, send a multimedia  
message, or save the email address to your  
contacts.  
Keep in mind that your response will be sent to the  
phone number of the latest message you’ve received  
from this contact.  
Forward a message. Tap the message (do not tap  
a link or a phone number) to open the options  
menu, and then tap Forward.  
1. On the All messages screen, tap a contact (or  
phone number) to display the exchange of  
messages with that contact.  
167  
2. Tap the “Add text” box, and then enter your reply  
If the attachment is a contact (vCard), tap it to  
view the contact information, and then tap Save to  
add to your contacts.  
message.  
3. Press  
number.  
and then tap More > Recipient phone  
If the attachment is an appointment or event  
(vCalendar), tap it to choose the calendar where  
to save it, and then tap Import.  
4. Select another phone number for this contact, and  
then tap OK.  
To save the attachment to your storage card,  
press and hold the multimedia message, and  
then choose to save the type of attachment from  
the options menu.  
Viewing and Saving an Attachment from a  
Multimedia Message  
If you are concerned about the size of your data  
downloads, check the multimedia message size first  
before you download it.  
Managing Message Conversations  
Text and multimedia messages that are sent to and  
received from a contact (or a number) are grouped into  
conversations or message threads in the All messages  
screen. Threaded text or multimedia messages let you  
see exchanged messages (similar to a chat program)  
with a contact on the screen.  
Note: When Auto-retrieve in MMS settings is disabled, only  
the message header is downloaded. To download the  
entire message, tap the Download button at the right  
side of the message. For details, see “Setting Text and  
Multimedia Message Options” later in this chapter.  
If there’s a media attachment such as a photo or  
video in a received message, tap it to view the  
content.  
168  
To protect a message from deletion:  
4. If the message is locked, tap Unlock message on  
the options menu, and then tap the message  
again to display the options menu.  
You can lock a message so that it will not be deleted  
even if you delete the other messages in the  
conversation.  
5. Tap Delete message on the options menu.  
6. When prompted to confirm, tap OK.  
1. Press  
and tap  
> Messages.  
To delete several messages within a conversation:  
2. On the All messages screen, tap a contact (or  
phone number) to display the exchange of  
messages with that contact.  
1. Press  
and tap  
> Messages.  
2. On the All messages screen, tap a contact (or  
phone number) to display the exchange of  
messages with that contact.  
3. Tap the message (not a link or a phone number)  
that you want to lock, and then tap Lock message.  
A lock icon  
message.  
is displayed at the lower right of the  
3. Press  
and then tap More > Delete.  
4. Tap Delete by selection.  
To delete a single message:  
1. Press and tap > Messages.  
Note: You can also tap Delete by phone number if the  
contact used multiple phone numbers throughout the  
conversation and you want to delete the messages  
sent from a particular number.  
2. On the All messages screen, tap a contact (or  
phone number) to display the exchange of  
messages with that contact.  
5. Select the messages you want to delete and then  
tap Delete.  
3. Tap the message (not a link or a phone number)  
that you want to delete.  
169  
To delete a conversation:  
Setting Text and Multimedia Message  
Options  
1. Do any of the following:  
On the All messages screen, press and hold a  
contact (or phone number) whose messages you  
want to delete, and then tap Delete.  
1. Press  
and tap  
> Messages.  
2. On the All messages screen, press  
tap Settings. You can set the following:  
and then  
While looking at the exchange of messages in a  
conversation, press  
Delete > Delete thread.  
Any locked messages in the conversation thread  
will not be deleted unless you select the Delete  
lock messages check box.  
and then tap More >  
Notifications  
Received messages  
Received notification: Select this option if you want  
to receive a notification in the status bar when a  
new text or multimedia message arrives.  
2. When prompted to confirm, tap OK to delete the  
entire thread.  
Play notification sound: If you want the device to  
ring when a new message arrives, select this  
option.  
To delete several conversations:  
1. On the All messages screen, press  
and then  
Notification sound: Select a ring tone that is  
specific to new text and multimedia messages.  
Note that the ring tone briefly plays when  
selected.  
tap Delete.  
2. Select the conversation threads you want to delete.  
3. Tap Delete. Any locked messages will not be  
deleted.  
Vibrate: Select this option if you want the device to  
vibrate when a new text or multimedia message  
arrives.  
170  
 
Sent messages  
SMS settings  
Priority setting: Set the message priority of text  
messages sent.  
Sent notification: Select this option if you want to  
receive a notification in the status bar when a  
message is sent successfully.  
SMS characters: Select this option to correctly display  
special accented characters in SMS messages.  
Failure notification: Select this option if you want to  
receive a notification in the status bar when a  
message is not sent successfully.  
MMS settings  
Play notification sound: If you want the device to  
ring when a sent or failure notification is received,  
select this option.  
Auto-retrieve: Select this option to automatically  
retrieve all your multimedia messages completely.  
When selected, the multimedia message header  
plus the message body and attachments will  
automatically download to your device. If you clear  
this check box, only the multimedia message header  
will be retrieved and shown in your All messages  
screen.  
Notification sound: Select a ring tone that is  
specific to sent or failure notifications. Note that  
the ring tone briefly plays when selected.  
Vibrate: Select this option if you want the device to  
vibrate when a new text or multimedia message  
arrives.  
Roaming auto-retrieve: Automatically retrieve all your  
messages completely when roaming. This may incur  
significant phone charges.  
Display message on screen: Set your phone to  
show pop-up notifications (not just in the status  
bar) when your messages are sent successfully  
or not. You can also select None to disable this  
option.  
Priority setting: Set the message priority of text  
messages sent.  
Maximum message size: Set the maximum file size of  
a multimedia message. The multimedia message will  
not be sent out if it exceeds the file size set here.  
171  
Connection settings: View various connection settings  
such as the connection name and server address.  
Multimedia message limit: Choose the maximum  
number of MMS messages to store in each  
conversation thread. (This does not include  
locked messages.)  
General  
Recipient list settings  
Message forwarding  
Show sent message history: Include the sent  
message history when searching for a message  
recipient.  
Note: Forwarding service may incur additional charges.  
Contact Sprint for details.  
Forward to phone number: Lets you forward text  
and multimedia messages to another phone.  
Show call history: Include the call history when  
searching for a message recipient.  
Forward to phone number: Lets you forward text  
and multimedia messages to an email address.  
Signature  
Show email address: Include email addresses  
when searching for a message recipient.  
Message preview  
Signature: Select this option to add a signature to  
all your outgoing text and multimedia messages.  
Message preview: Set the number of lines of text  
to appear in the conversation on the All  
messages screen.  
Use signature: Tap to compose your own  
signature.  
Storage settings  
Delete old messages: Automatically delete older  
messages, except for locked messages, when the  
set limits are reached.  
Adding the Messages Widget  
Add the Messages widget so you can read your  
messages right on the Home screen.  
Text message limit: Choose the maximum number  
of text messages to store in each conversation  
thread. (This does not include locked messages.)  
To learn how to add widgets, refer to “Customizing the  
172  
Caller ID  
Call Waiting  
Caller ID identifies a caller before you answer the  
device by displaying the number of the incoming call. If  
you do not want your number displayed when you  
make a call, follow these steps.  
When you’re on a call, Call Waiting alerts you to  
incoming calls by sounding two beeps. Your device’s  
screen informs you that another call is coming in and  
displays the caller’s phone number (if it is available and  
you are in digital mode).  
1. Press  
and tap  
.
To respond to an incoming call while you’re on a call:  
2. Tap  
.
Press  
and then tap Flash.  
3. Enter a phone number.  
4. Tap  
This puts the first caller on hold and answers the  
second call.  
.
To permanently block your number, call Sprint  
Customer Service.  
To switch back to the first caller:  
Press and then tap Flash again.  
Tip: For those calls where you don’t want to be interrupted,  
you can temporarily disable Call Waiting by pressing  
before placing your call. Call Waiting is  
automatically reactivated once you end the call.  
173  
       
Making a 3-Way Call  
Call Forwarding  
With 3-Way Calling, you can talk to two people at the  
same time. When using this feature, the normal airtime  
rates will be charged for each of the two calls.  
Call Forwarding lets you forward all your incoming calls  
to another phone number – even when your device is  
turned off. You can continue to make calls from your  
device when you have activated Call Forwarding.  
1. On the Phone screen, enter a number and   
Note: You are charged a higher rate for calls you have  
tap  
.
forwarded.  
2. Once you have established the connection,   
press , tap Add call, and dial the number of the  
second participant. (This puts the first caller on  
hold and dials the second number.)  
To activate Call Forwarding:  
1. Press  
and tap  
.
2. Tap  
.
3. When you’re connected to the second party,   
press  
and tap Merge calls.  
3. Enter the area code and phone number to which  
you want your calls forwarded.  
If one of the people you called hangs up during your  
call, you and the remaining caller stay connected. If you  
initiated the call and are the first to hang up, all callers  
are disconnected.  
4. Tap  
. (You will see a message and  
hear a tone to confirm the activation of Call  
Forwarding.)  
To end the three-way call, tap  
.
To deactivate Call Forwarding:  
1. Press  
2. Tap  
3. Tap  
and tap  
..  
.
. (You will see a message and  
hear a tone to confirm the deactivation.)  
174  
       
Checking for Voicemail Messages While  
Roaming  
Roaming  
Roaming Icon  
When you are roaming off the Nationwide Sprint  
Network, you may not receive on-device notification of  
new voicemail messages. Callers can still leave  
messages, but you will need to periodically check your  
voicemail for new messages if you are in a roaming  
service area for an extended period of time.  
Your display screen always lets you know when you’re  
off the Nationwide Sprint Network. Anytime you are  
roaming, the device displays the roaming icon (  
).  
Roaming on Other Digital Networks  
1. Dial your area code + your phone number.  
When you’re roaming on digital networks, your call  
quality and security will be similar to the quality you  
receive when making calls on the Nationwide Sprint  
Network. However, you may not be able to access  
certain features, such as data services, depending on  
the available network.  
2. When you hear your voicemail greeting,   
tap  
.
3. Enter your passcode at the prompt and follow the  
voice prompts.  
When you return to the Nationwide Sprint Network,  
voicemail notification will resume as normal.  
Note: If you’re on a call when you leave the Nationwide Sprint  
Network, your call is dropped. If your call is dropped in  
an area where you think Sprint service is available, turn  
your device off and on again to reconnect to the  
network.  
175  
     
Setting Roam Mode  
Roaming Guards  
Your device allows you to control your roaming  
capabilities. By using the Roaming menu option, you  
can determine which signals your device accepts.  
Your device has two ways of alerting you when you are  
roaming off the Nationwide Sprint Network: the  
onscreen roaming icon and Roaming Guards.  
Roaming Guards make it easy to manage your  
roaming by requiring an extra step before you can  
place or answer a roaming call, connect to data  
services, or send an outgoing text message. (This  
additional step is not required when you make or  
receive calls while on the Nationwide Sprint Network.)  
Choose from two different settings on your dual-band  
device to control your roaming experience.  
1. Press  
>
.
2. Tap Settings > Wireless & networks >   
Mobile networks.  
You can set the Roaming Guards to separately monitor  
your voice, data, and outgoing text messages when  
you’re roaming within or outside the United States.  
3. Tap Roaming.  
Sprint only to access only the Sprint network and  
prevent roaming on other networks.  
To turn Roaming Guards on or off:  
Automatic to seek service on the Nationwide  
Sprint Network. When Sprint service is  
unavailable, the device searches for an alternate  
system.  
1. Press  
>
.
2. Tap Settings > Wireless & networks >   
Mobile networks > Roaming Guards.  
176  
   
3. Select the check boxes of the items you want  
Roaming Guard to monitor; clear the check box to  
turn off Roaming Guard for that item.  
Notes: Your device’s Roaming Guards are turned on by  
default.  
Voice dialing and speed dialing are not available  
when you are roaming with Roaming Guard enabled.  
To place roaming calls with Roaming Guard on:  
1. On the Phone screen, dial your area code + the  
seven-digit number and tap  
.
2. Select Roam Call.  
To answer incoming roaming calls with Roaming Guard  
on:  
Tap Answer. (A message will be displayed notifying  
you that roaming charges will apply.)  
Note: If the Call Guard check box is selected, you need to  
take extra steps to make and receive roaming calls.  
To use data services when Roaming Guard is on:  
When a pop-up notification appears informing you that  
data roam charges may apply, tap Roam to connect.  
177  
Ways of Connecting to the Internet  
3B. Web and Data Services  
Your device’s networking capabilities allow you to  
wirelessly access the Internet or your corporate  
network through one of the following connections:  
Wi-Fi  
Sprint 4G  
Data Services  
Virtual Private Networks or VPN  
Connecting Using Wi-Fi  
Wi-Fi provides wireless Internet access over distances  
of up to 300 feet. To use your device’s Wi-Fi, you need  
access to a wireless access point or “hotspot.”  
Note: The availability and range of the Wi-Fi signal depends  
on a number of factors, including infrastructure and  
other objects through which the signal passes.  
178  
           
Depending on the network type and its security  
settings, you may also need to enter more information  
or choose a security certificate.  
Turning Wi-Fi On and Connecting to a  
Wireless Network  
1. Press  
>
and tap Settings >   
When your device is connected to a wireless network,  
Wireless & networks.  
the Wi-Fi icon (  
) appears in the status bar and tells  
you the approximate signal strength (number of bands  
displayed).  
2. Select the Wi-Fi check box to turn Wi-Fi on. The  
device will scan for available wireless networks.  
3. Tap Wi-Fi settings. The network names and security  
settings (Open network or Secured with WEP) of  
detected Wi-Fi networks are displayed in the Wi-Fi  
networks section.  
The next time your device connects to a previously  
accessed secured wireless network, you will not be  
prompted to enter the WEP key again, unless you reset  
your device to its factory default settings.  
4. Do one of the following:  
If Network notification in Wi-Fi settings is enabled, this  
icon (  
) appears in the status bar whenever the  
Tap an open Wi-Fi network to automatically  
connect to it.  
device detects an available wireless network within  
range.  
Tap a secured Wi-Fi network, enter the WEP key,  
and tap Connect.  
If the wireless network you want to connect to is  
not in the list of detected networks, scroll down  
the screen, and then tap Add Wi-Fi network. Enter  
the wireless network settings, and then tap Save.  
179  
   
Checking the Wireless Network Status  
Connecting to Another Wi-Fi Network  
1. Press  
>
and tap Settings >   
1. On the Wireless & networks screen, tap Wi-Fi  
settings. Detected Wi-Fi networks are displayed in  
the Wi-Fi networks section.  
Wireless & networks.  
2. On the Wireless & networks screen, tap Wi-Fi  
settings, and then tap the wireless network that the  
device is currently connected to.  
2. To manually scan for available Wi-Fi networks,  
press  
and tap Scan.  
A message box is then displayed showing the Wi-Fi  
network name, status, speed, and more.  
3. Tap another Wi-Fi network to connect to it.  
Adding the Wi-Fi Widget  
Add the Wi-Fi widget to the Home screen to make it  
faster for you to turn Wi-Fi on or off.  
To learn how to add widgets, see “Customizing the  
Note: If you want to remove the settings for this network from  
your device, tap Forget. If you want to reconnect to a  
wireless network that you have removed, you'll need to  
choose the wireless network from the list of available  
Wi-Fi networks again. If it is a secured wireless network,  
you'll need to enter the wireless network credentials  
again.  
180  
 
Turning Sprint 4G On and Connecting to  
the Sprint 4G Network  
Connecting Using Sprint 4G  
Sprint 4G provides your device with wireless Internet  
access over greater distances than Wi-Fi and delivers  
data transfer rates of up to 30 Mbps. To connect your  
device to Sprint 4G network, you need access to a  
Sprint 4G base station.  
1. Press  
>
and tap Settings >   
Wireless & networks.  
2. Scroll down the screen and select the 4G check  
box. The device will automatically scan for the  
Sprint 4G network and will automatically connect  
to it.  
For more information about the availability of Sprint 4G  
in your location, visit sprint.com/coverage on the Web.  
When your device is connected to the Sprint 4G  
network, the 4G icon ( ) appears in the status bar  
and tells you the approximate signal strength (number  
of bands displayed). If Network notification in 4G  
settings is enabled, this icon ( ) appears in the status  
bar whenever the device detects the Sprint 4G network.  
Note: The availability and range of the Sprint 4G depends on  
a number of factors including your distance to the  
Sprint 4G base station, and infrastructure and other  
objects through which the signal passes.  
Note: The Sprint 4G network is self-discoverable, which  
means no additional steps are required for your device  
to connect to it.  
181  
         
Checking the Sprint 4G Network Status  
Getting Started With Data Services  
1. Press  
>
and tap Settings >   
With your Sprint service, you are ready to start enjoying  
the advantages of data services. This section will help  
you learn the basics of using your data services,  
including managing your user name, launching a data  
connection, and navigating the Web with your device.  
Wireless & networks.  
2. Scroll down the screen and tap 4G settings.  
The network name, signal strength, and IP address  
are displayed.  
Adding the Sprint 4G Widget  
Your User Name  
Add the Sprint 4G widget to the Home screen to make  
it faster for you to turn it on or off.  
When you buy your device and sign up for service,  
you’re automatically assigned a user name, which is  
typically based on your name and a number, followed  
by “@sprintpcs.com.” (For example, the third John  
Smith to sign up for Sprint data services might have  
[email protected] as his user name.)  
When you use Sprint data services, your user name is  
submitted to identify you to the Nationwide Sprint  
Network. Your user name will be automatically  
programmed into your device. You don’t have to enter it.  
182  
       
Finding Your User Name  
Data Connection Status and Indicators  
If you aren’t sure what your user name is, you can  
easily find it on your device.  
Your device displays the current status of your data  
connection through indicators at the top of the screen.  
The following symbols are used:  
Press  
>
and tap Settings > About phone >  
Phone identity > Current username.  
Your device is connected to the high-speed  
Sprint 3G network (EVDO). When the arrows  
are white, your device is transferring data (for  
example, when you are opening a Web page);  
when the arrows are gray, your device is  
connected to the network but is not currently  
transferring data (for example, when you are  
viewing a Web page that is completely open).  
In either state, you can receive incoming calls.  
Updating Your User Name  
If you choose to change your user name and select a  
new one online, you must then update the user name  
on your device.  
Press  
>
and tap Settings > System   
updates > Update profile. (Tap Cancel to cancel the  
update.)  
Your device is on and is connected to the Sprint  
1xRTT data network. When the arrows are white,  
your device is transferring data (for example,  
when you are opening a Web page) and you  
cannot receive calls. When the arrows are gray,  
your device is connected to the network but is not  
currently transferring data (for example, when you  
are viewing a Web page that is completely open),  
and you can receive calls.  
Launching a Web Connection  
Press  
and tap  
> Internet.  
Your data connection starts and you see the  
SprintWebSM home page.  
183  
       
If you do not see an indicator, your device does not  
have a current data connection. To launch a  
Connecting to a Virtual Private  
Network (VPN)  
Turning the Data Connection On or Off  
From your device, you can add, set up, and manage  
virtual private networks (VPNs) that allow you to  
connect and access resources inside a secured local  
network, such as your corporate network.  
Turning your data connection off can help optimize  
your battery life. It can also save money on data  
charges. However, when your data connection is  
turned off, you may not always receive automatic  
updates to your email, social network accounts, and  
other synchronized information.  
Preparing Your Device for VPN Connection  
Depending on the type of VPN you are using at work,  
you may be required to enter your login credentials or  
install security certificates before you can connect to  
your company’s local network. You can get this  
information from your network administrator.  
1. Press  
>
and tap Settings >   
Wireless & networks.  
2. Select the Mobile network check box to turn on the  
data connection; clear the check box to turn off the  
data connection.  
Also, your device must first establish a Wi-Fi or data  
connection before you can initiate a VPN connection.  
For information about setting up and using these  
connections on your device, see “Launching a Web  
Adding the Data Connection Widget  
Add the Data connection widget to the Home screen to  
make it faster for you to turn the device’s data  
connection on or off.  
184  
     
3. Tap VPN settings and set them up according to the  
security details you you got from your network  
administrator.  
Setting Up Secure Credential Storage  
If your network administrator instructs you to download  
and install security certificates, you must first set up the  
device’s secure credential storage.  
4. When finished, press  
, and then tap Save.  
The VPN is then added to the VPNs section of the VPN  
settings screen.  
1. Press  
>
, tap Settings > Security, and then  
tap Set password.  
2. Enter a new password (at least eight characters  
without any spaces) for the credential storage,  
scroll down and confirm the password, and then  
tap OK.  
Connecting to a VPN  
1. Press  
>
and then tap Settings >   
Wireless & networks > VPN settings.  
2. In the VPNs section, tap the VPN that you want to  
connect to.  
3. Select the Use secure credentials check box.  
You can then download and install the certificates  
needed to access your local network. Your network  
administrator can tell you how to do this.  
3. When prompted, enter your log in credentials, and  
then tap Connect. When you are connected, the  
VPN connected icon  
appears in the  
notification area of the title bar.  
Adding a VPN Connection  
4. You can then open the Web browser to access  
resources such as intranet sites on your corporate  
network. (For more information, see “To open the  
1. Press  
>
and tap Settings > Wireless &  
networks > VPN settings.  
2. Tap Add VPN, and then tap the type of VPN you  
want to add.  
185  
   
Disconnecting From a VPN  
Using the Device’s Web Browser  
1. Press and hold the status bar, and then drag down  
to open the Notifications panel.  
Open the browser to start surfing the Web. The browser  
is fully optimized and comes with advanced features  
that let you enjoy Internet browsing on your device.  
2. Tap the VPN connection to return to the VPN  
settings screen, and then tap the VPN connection  
to disconnect from it.  
Note: You must have an active data connection or Wi-Fi  
connection to access the Internet.  
When your device has disconnected from the VPN, the  
VPN disconnected icon  
notification area of the status bar.  
is displayed in the  
To open the Browser:  
Press  
and tap  
> Internet.  
The Browser Menu  
Although the home page offers a broad and  
convenient array of sites and services for you to  
browse, not all sites are represented, and certain  
functions, such as going directly to specific websites,  
are not available. For these and other functions, you will  
need to use the browser menu. The browser menu  
offers additional options to expand your use of the Web  
on your device.  
The browser menu may be opened any time you have  
an active data session, from any page you are viewing.  
186  
     
To open the browser menu:  
Press while on the browser.  
Share page: Lets you send the website URL using  
Bluetooth, Facebook, Friend Stream, Gmail, Mail,  
Messages, or Peep.  
Options available under the browser menu include:  
Downloads: Lets you view applications that you  
have downloaded from the Web.  
Back: Returns you to a previously viewed page (after  
having tapped Forward).  
History: Keeps a list of links to your most recently  
visited sites. To navigate to a site, touch a site.  
Forward: Returns you to a previously viewed page  
(after having tapped Back).  
Print: Lets you print Web pages to a connected  
printer using Wi-Fi.  
Add bookmark: Allows you to bookmark the current  
site.  
Settings: Opens the browser settings.  
Bookmarks: Allows you to access and manage your  
bookmarks.  
Going to a Website  
1. On the browser screen, press  
box at the top of the screen.  
and tap the URL  
Windows: Allows you to open additional browser windows.  
More  
2. Enter the website address using the keyboard. As  
you enter the address, matching website  
addresses will appear on the screen.  
Home: Lets you return to your home page.  
Find on page: Allows you to find specific text on a  
Web page.  
3. Do any of the following:  
Tap an address to go directly to that website.  
Select text: Allows you to select text to copy,  
looking up for information, and share. For more  
Continue entering the website address and then  
tap  
.
Page info: Lets you display the information about  
the website.  
187  
You can also use your fingers to spread or pinch  
the screen to zoom in and out.  
Changing the Screen Orientation  
The device automatically changes the screen  
orientation depending on how you are holding your  
device.  
Turn your device sideways to display the Web browser  
in landscape orientation.  
Notes: If the screen orientation doesn’t change automatically,  
turn on automatic screen orientation. Press  
tap Display, and then select the Auto-rotate screen  
>
,
check box.  
Navigating and Zooming on a Web Page  
You can swipe your finger on the screen to  
navigate and view other areas of the Web page.  
Tap the screen twice quickly to zoom in, and then  
tap the screen twice quickly again to zoom out.  
188  
     
Selecting a Link on a Web Page  
You can tap a link to open it, or press and hold a link  
for more options.  
Selecting an Address or a Phone Number on a  
Web Page  
You can map an address or call a phone number on a  
Web page.  
Tip: Zoom in on the Web page when links are too small for  
tapping directly on the screen.  
Link  
What to do  
Location  
address  
Tap the address to copy it or map it using  
Google Maps.  
Link  
What to do  
Phone  
number  
Tap to open the Phone screen to call the  
phone number. Tap the phone number  
to copy, call, send a text message to that  
number, or save the number to a contact  
in People.  
Web page  
address  
(URLs)  
Tap the link to open the Web page.  
Press and hold the link to open a menu  
that allows you to open, bookmark, copy  
to the clipboard, or share the link.  
Email  
address  
Tap to send an email message to the  
email address.  
Opening a New Browser Window  
Press and hold, and then tap Copy on  
the menu to copy the email address to  
the clipboard. You can paste the email  
address later when creating a new  
contact or sending a new email  
message.  
Open multiple browser windows to make it easier for  
you to switch from one website to another.  
1. While viewing a Web page, press  
Windows.  
and tap  
2. Tap  
3. Enter the address of the Web page you want to go  
to, and then tap  
.
.
189  
 
Switching Between Browser Windows  
Downloading from the Web  
1. While viewing a Web page, do one of the  
Do more than just browsing the Web. You can  
download Web files such as photos and apps then  
save them on your storage card.  
following:  
Press  
and tap Windows.  
Pinch the screen (zoom out) until you see the  
other browser windows.  
Downloading Applications From the Web  
You can download applications directly from your  
favorite websites. Applications downloaded from the  
Web can be from unknown sources. To protect your  
device and personal data, we strongly recommend that  
you download and install only applications you trust.  
2. Select the browser window you want to view by  
sliding your finger on the screen from right to left.  
1. Press  
>
and tap Settings > Applications.  
2. Select the Unknown sources check box.  
3. When the Attention dialog box opens, tap OK.  
4. Open the device’s Web browser, and then go to  
the website where you can download the  
application you want.  
3. Tap a Web page window to open it in full-screen  
mode.  
Tip: Zoom in on the Web page when links are too small for  
tapping directly on the screen.  
190  
5. Follow the website’s instructions for downloading  
Copying Text, Looking Up Information, and  
Sharing  
the application.  
Note: All downloaded applications are saved to the microSD  
card. Before you download an application from the  
Web, make sure that you have installed a microSD card  
on your device. For information on how to install a  
page 127. The app you want to download should also  
be compatible with your device.  
You can select text on a Web page and then:  
Copy it.  
Look it up on Wikipedia or in Google Dictionary.  
Get a translation of the text from Google Translate.  
Share the text in a new email, text, or multimedia  
message or in your status update on a social  
network.  
Viewing Your Downloads  
While viewing a Web page, press  
and tap   
More > Downloads.  
Selecting Text  
1. Press and hold on a word.  
Tip: To select text in a link, press and hold the link, and then  
tap Select text.  
2. Drag the start and end markers to highlight the  
surrounding text you want to select. You can drag  
to increase or decrease the text selection area.  
3. Tap an icon to copy, search or translate, or share  
the selected text.  
191  
   
4. To select a larger block of text, you can drag these  
markers up or down.  
3. Tap Paste.  
Searching or Translating Text  
1. After you have selected the text you want to search  
or translate, tap Quick lookup (  
).  
2. Tap one of the following tabs:  
Google Search  
Google the selected text.  
3
2
Wikipedia  
the selected text in Wikipedia.  
Look for related information about  
YouTube  
Look for related YouTube videos  
about the selected text.  
4
Google Translate  
Translate the selected text  
to another language.  
Google Dictionary  
Look up the selected text  
in the dictionary.  
Copying and Pasting Text  
Pasting Text in a New Message or Social Network  
Status Update  
1. After you have selected the text you want to copy,  
tap Copy (  
). The selected text is then copied to  
1. After you have selected the text you want to share,  
the clipboard.  
tap Share (  
).  
2. In a text box (for example while composing a  
message), press and hold at the point where you  
want to paste the text.  
2. Select an option to paste the selected text in a new  
email, text or multimedia message or in your status  
update on a social network such as Twitter.  
192  
3. Tap the bookmark you want to edit.  
4. Enter your changes and tap Edit.  
To view a previously visited page:  
Viewing Bookmarks and Previously Visited  
Web Pages  
You can store as many bookmarks as you want on  
your device. You can also access a convenient list of  
the sites you have visited, or quickly view the pages  
that you access most often.  
1. While viewing a Web page, press  
Bookmarks.  
and tap  
2. On the History tab  
, navigate to the page you  
want to view and then tap the page.  
To bookmark a website:  
1. While viewing a Web page, press  
, and then tap  
Add bookmark. The New bookmark screen opens.  
To clear the list of previously visited pages:  
1. While viewing a Web page, press  
Bookmarks.  
and tap  
2. Edit the bookmark name if needed, and then tap  
Done.  
2. On the History tab  
Clear history.  
, press  
, and then tap  
To open a bookmark:  
1. While viewing a Web page, press  
and tap  
To view a page that you often visit:  
Bookmarks.  
1. While viewing a Web page, press  
Bookmarks.  
and tap  
2. On the Bookmarks tab  
, navigate to the  
bookmark you want to open, and then tap it.  
2. On the Most Visited tab  
you want to view, and then tap the page.  
, navigate to the page  
To edit a bookmark:  
1. While viewing a Web page, press  
Bookmarks.  
and tap  
2. On the Bookmarks tab  
, press  
and tap Edit.  
193  
 
To clear the list of most visited pages:  
Setting Browser Options  
1. While viewing a Web page, press  
Bookmarks.  
and tap  
Setting Your Home Page  
1. With the browser open, press  
More > Settings > Set home page.  
and then tap  
2. On the Most Visited tab  
tap Clear all.  
, press  
, and then  
2. In the Set home page screen, select the home  
To change the view of bookmarks or most visited pages:  
page you want to use.  
1. While viewing a Web page, press  
Bookmarks.  
and tap  
Use default to set the SprintWebSM home page as  
your home page.  
2. On the browser screen, press  
Bookmarks.  
and tap  
Use current to set the current Web page you are  
browsing as your home page.  
3. On the Bookmarks tab  
or the Most visited tab  
, press , and then tap Thumbnails, List, or  
Set home page to enter the URL of the website you  
want to use as your home page.  
Grid to change the view.  
Browsing Full Versions of Web Pages  
For example, if you are in Thumbnails view and you  
want to view bookmarks in a grid, press  
List, and then press and tap Grid.  
and tap  
Some websites display a mobile version of their pages  
to mobile Web browsers. You can choose to view the  
full version of all pages, even for these sites.  
1. While viewing a Web page, press  
More > Settings.  
and tap   
2. Clear the Mobile view check box.  
194  
   
Mobile view: For more information, see “Browsing  
Finding Text In a Web Page  
1. While viewing a Web page, press  
More > Find on page.  
and tap   
Enable JavaScript: Select to support JavaScript  
content on Web pages.  
2. Enter the search item. As you enter characters,  
matching characters will be highlighted in green.   
Tap the left or right arrow to go to the previous or  
next matching item.  
Open in background: Select to open a new  
Browser window behind the current one you’re  
vewing.  
Set text size: Set the text size for your viewing  
comfort.  
Other Browser Options  
Set text encoding: Set the text encoding to  
properly display text on Web pages.  
You can set the browser display, privacy, and security  
settings on the browser’s Settings screen.  
Default zoom: Set the default zoom level when you  
open full versions of Web pages.  
While viewing a Web page, press  
More > Settings.  
and tap   
Open pages in overview: Select to display an  
overview of newly-opened Web pages.  
Home page configuration  
Set home page: For more information, see “Setting  
Landscape-only display: Set the screen to  
automatically shift to landscape display when in  
the browser.  
Display configuration  
Load images: Select to display images on Web  
pages.  
Enable GIF animation: Select to display GIF  
animation on Web pages.  
Privacy configuration  
Block pop-up windows: Select to block pop-up  
windows.  
Clear all cookie data: Tap to delete all browser  
cookies.  
195  
 
Advanced configuration  
Clear cache: Tap to delete all locally cached  
content and databases.  
Set cache size: Set the amount of memory to use  
for caching Web content.  
Clear history: Tap to delete your browsing history.  
Enable plugins: Set how to enable Web plug-ins.  
Clear form data: Tap to delete all saved form data.  
Set search engine: Set the default search engine  
to use.  
Clear passwords: Tap to delete all saved  
passwords you use to access secured websites.  
Website settings: Set advanced settings for  
individual websites.  
Clear location access: Tap to delete all location  
access for all Web pages you’ve visited.  
Proxy settings: Tap to enable Wi-Fi proxy settings  
Security configuration  
and set the Wi-Fi proxy host and port.  
Remember passwords: Select to save all  
usernames and passwords you use to access  
secured websites.  
Reset to default: Tap to reset the browser settings  
to default.  
Remember form data: Select to save all data  
you’ve entered in forms on Web pages.  
Show security warnings: Select to display a  
warning if there is a problem with a website’s  
security.  
Accept cookies: Select to allow websites to save  
and read cookies stored on your device.  
Enable location: Select to allow websites to  
request access to your lcoation.  
196  
4. If the account type you want to set up is not in the  
device database, you’ll be asked to enter more  
details.  
Mail  
Use the Mail application to send and receive email  
from your webmail or other accounts, using POP3 or  
IMAP. You can also access your Exchange ActiveSync  
email and other features on your device. Mail allows  
you to stay connected 24 hours a day anywhere on the  
Nationwide Sprint Network.  
5. Enter the Account name and Your name and tap  
Finish setup.  
Adding an Exchange ActiveSync Account  
You can add one or more Microsoft Exchange  
ActiveSync accounts on your device. You can sync  
with Microsoft Exchange Server 2003 Service Pack  
(SP2) or later.  
Adding a POP3/IMAP Email Account  
1. Press  
and tap  
> Mail.  
1. Press  
and tap  
> Mail.  
2. Do one of the following:  
If this is your first time to add an email account in  
Mail, tap Other (POP3/IMAP) on the Choose a mail  
provider screen.  
2. Do one of the following:  
If this is your first time to add an email account in  
Mail, tap Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync on the  
Choose a mail provider screen.  
If you have already added an email account in  
Mail, press  
and then tap More > New Account.  
If you have already added an email account in  
If the Choose a mail provider screen is displayed,  
tap Other (POP3/IMAP).  
Mail, press  
and then tap More > New Account.  
If the Choose a mail provider screen is displayed,  
tap Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync.  
3. Enter the Email address and Password for the email  
account and then tap Next.  
3. Enter the Exchange ActiveSync account details  
and then tap Next.  
197  
         
Your corporate Exchange Server must support  
auto-detect for the device to automatically set up  
the Exchange ActiveSync account. If your  
corporate Exchange Server does not support auto-  
detect, you will need to enter your Exchange  
Server settings after you tap Next. Ask your  
Exchange Server administrator for details.  
Switching Between Email Accounts  
To switch between email accounts, tap the bar that shows  
the current email account, and then tap another account.  
4. Select the types of information you want to  
synchronize. Also choose how often you want to  
update and sync email to your device, and then  
tap Next.  
5. Enter the account name, and then tap Finish setup.  
Viewing Email Messages From All Your Email  
Accounts  
Checking Your Mail Inbox  
You can view email messages from all your accounts  
just in one place without having to switch to different  
accounts.  
When you open the Mail application, it displays the  
inbox of one of your email accounts that you’ve set up  
on your device.  
Just tap the bar that shows the current email account,  
and then tap All accounts. Email messages are color  
coded so you can easily distinguish which email  
accounts they belong to.  
Note: Up to 15 email accounts can be shown in the unified  
inbox.  
198  
 
5. Marked (Exchange ActiveSync only): Displays all  
Switching Between Inbox Views  
flagged messages.  
If you have lots of email messages, it may take you  
some time to browse through the long list and find a  
single email or related email messages. Use the tabs of  
the Mail app to sort your emails into different  
categories.  
6. Meeting invitations (Exchange ActiveSync only):  
Displays meeting invitations which you have not  
yet accepted or declined.  
7. Attachments: Displays all messages that have  
attachments.  
To skim through your email messages easier, tap one  
of the following tabs to change the view of your inbox:  
Refreshing an Email Account  
Whatever your automatic synchronization settings are,  
you can also synchronize your sent and received email  
messages manually at any time.  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
1. Inbox: Displays email messages as individual items.  
While in the account you want to synchronize,  
press and tap Refresh.  
2. Conversations: Displays messages as conversations,  
grouped according to the subject line. Tap a subject in  
the list to show the email conversation.  
If you have several email accounts, you can refresh  
them all at the same time. Go to the unified inbox  
first, press  
and tap Refresh.  
3. Favorites: Displays all email messages from a  
contact group. To choose which contact group to  
display, press  
, tap View, and then select a  
group. For more information on contact groups,  
4. Unread: Displays unread messages.  
199  
 
Sorting Email Messages  
Managing Email Messages  
You can sort email messages by date received, priority,  
subject, sender, or size.  
Deleting Email Messages  
1. Do one of the following to delete email messages  
from your email inbox:  
On the email inbox, press  
the sorting options.  
, tap Sort, and select from  
To delete one or more email messages, tap the  
check before the email message/s that you want  
to delete.  
Quickly Browsing Your Inbox  
If you have a long list of email messages in your inbox,  
it may not be easy to browse the list and find an email  
that you want. You can quickly browse through your  
inbox by using finger gestures.  
To delete all email messages from your inbox, tap  
the check before an email message, press  
and tap Select All.  
2. Tap Delete.  
1. On the email inbox, select a sorting order for  
displaying your email messages. For more  
Moving Email Messages to Another Folder  
1. Switch to the email account that you want to use.  
2. Press and hold two fingers on any email message,  
and then drag upward or downward without lifting  
your fingers. Your screen then jumps to the set of  
email messages based on your chosen sorting  
order.  
2. Tap the check boxes of email messages you want  
to move.  
3. Tap Move to, and then tap the folder where to move  
the email messages.  
200  
       
As you enter email addresses, any matching  
addresses from your contacts list are displayed.  
Tap a match to enter the address directly.  
Moving an Email Message After Reading  
1. On the email inbox, tap a message to open it.  
2. In the open message, press  
, and then tap   
Tap the  
icon, and then select the contacts to  
Move to.  
whom you want to send the email. You can also  
select contact groups as recipients, or search and  
add contacts from the company directory if you  
have set up an Exchange ActiveSync account on  
your device. When you have selected all the  
message recipients, tap Done.  
3. Tap the folder where you want to move the email  
message.  
Switching to Other Mail Folders  
1. On an email inbox, press  
, and then tap Folders.  
Tip: If you want to send a carbon copy (Cc) or a blind carbon  
2. Tap the mail folder that you want to view.  
copy (Bcc) of the email to other recipients, press  
and  
tap Show Cc/Bcc.  
Composing and Sending Email  
5. Enter the subject, and then compose your  
1. Press  
and tap  
> Mail.  
message.  
2. Switch to the email account that you want to use  
for sending email.  
6. To add an attachment, press  
, tap Attach, and  
choose from the following options:  
3. On the email account inbox, press  
and tap  
Picture: Select Camera to take a photo and attach  
it, or Gallery to attach a photo from your microSD  
card.  
Compose.  
4. Fill in one or more recipients. You can:  
Enter email addresses directly in the To field,  
separating them with a comma.   
Video: Select Camcorder to capture a video and  
attach it, or Videos to attach a video from your  
microSD card.  
201  
   
Audio: Select Voice Recorder to make a voice  
recording and attach it, or Files to attach a music  
file or voice recording from your microSD card.  
7. Tap Send to send the message immediately, or tap  
Save as draft if you want to send it later.  
Note: If there’s no Wi-Fi or data connection available or  
Airplane mode is on when you send your email, the  
email is saved to the Outbox folder. Once there’s Wi-Fi  
or data connection available, the saved email will be  
sent automatically next time your device syncs.  
App recommendation: Choose an application  
you’ve installed from Android Market that you  
want to tell other people about. The URL from  
which the app can be downloaded will be  
inserted in your email.  
To resume a draft email message:  
Location: You can attach location information.  
Send your current location (requires GPS to be  
turned on), a location stored in Footprints, or a  
location you pick on a map. (For more information  
about GPS, maps, and Footprints, see “GPS  
1. Press  
and tap  
> Mail.  
2. In the email account inbox, press , and then tap  
Folders > Drafts.  
3. Tap the message.  
4. When you finish editing the message, tap Send.  
Document: Attach a PDF file or an Office  
document such as a text file or a spreadsheet.  
Reading and Replying to an Email Message  
Contact (vCard): Attach someone’s contact  
information.  
1. Press  
and tap  
> Mail.  
2. Switch to the email account you want to use.  
Appointment (vCalendar): Attach a calendar event.  
3. On the email account inbox, tap the email you  
want to read.  
File: Attach any file from your storage card.  
202  
 
4. Do any of the following:  
Printing Your Email Messages  
Do you need to print your email? Not a problem.  
Connect your device to a supported printer and start  
printing out your email messages.  
Reply to the email: Tap Reply or Reply all to reply to  
the message.  
Forward the email: Press  
and tap Forward.  
Delete the email: Press  
and tap Delete.  
Notes: Both printer and your device must be turned on and  
connected to the same local network. To learn how to  
connect the device to the local wireless network, see  
Network” on page 179. To learn how to connect the  
printer to the local network, refer to your printer user  
guide.  
Mark the email as unread: Press  
unread.  
and tap Mark  
Setting the Priority for an Email Message  
You can set the priority for an email message that you  
send.  
The local network must not be behind a firewall.  
1. Press  
and tap  
> Mail.  
1. Press  
and tap  
> Mail.  
2. Compose an email message. For more  
2. Switch to the email account you want to use.  
3. On the email account inbox, tap the email you  
want to print.  
3. Tap Set priority.  
4. Select the priority for the message.  
4. Press  
and tap More > Print.  
If you selected High or Low priority, the priority appears  
below the subject line of the message.  
5. If the printer appears on the list, tap it.  
Otherwise, tap Scan for printers or Add printer and  
then follow the onscreen instructions to add the  
printer to the list.  
203  
 
6. In the Print preview screen, you can select which  
pages to print, set the number of copies, or select  
to fit the email messages on the page.  
To flag email messages:  
While viewing your Exchange ActiveSync email  
inbox, tap the white flag icon (  
the right of an email message. The icon turns red  
) after you flagged the email.  
) that appears on  
Tip: Tap Advanced to set the page size, print layout, and  
page orientation, and whether you want to print in color  
or black-and-white.  
(
While reading an email, tap the flag icon in the email.  
7. Tap Print.  
To synchronize Exchange ActiveSync email:  
You can check the printing progress by opening the  
Notifications panel, and then tapping the item you’re  
printing.  
You can set Exchange ActiveSync to automatically  
check for new Exchange ActiveSync email messages.  
For more information, see “Synchronizing Exchange  
Working with Exchange ActiveSync Email  
To set your Out of the office status:  
If you sync your device with your work Exchange  
ActiveSync account, you can read, reply, send, and  
manage email in the same easy way as with a  
POP3/IMAP account. In addition, you can also use  
some powerful Exchange features.  
You can set your Out of Office status and auto-reply  
message right from your device.  
1. While viewing your Exchange ActiveSync email  
inbox, press  
and tap More > Out of the office.  
Note: You must switch to your Exchange ActiveSync email  
account before you can use these features. For more  
2. Tap the field below I am currently, and then select  
Out of the office.  
3. Set the dates and times for the period when you  
will be out of the office.  
4. Enter the auto-reply message.  
5. Tap Save.  
204  
       
To send a meeting request:  
Set as default account: Select to use the current  
email account as the default account to send  
email messages.  
1. While viewing your Exchange ActiveSync email  
inbox, press  
and tap More > New meeting  
Attachment cache: Select where to save email  
attachments.  
invitation.  
2. Enter the meeting details, and then tap Save.  
Ask before deleting: Select to display a  
confirmation box when deleting email messages.  
Changing Email Account Settings  
Refresh on open: Select to automatically refresh  
an email folder when you open it.  
1. Press  
and tap  
> Mail.  
2. Switch to the email account that you want to  
change.  
Portrait body preview: Set the number of lines of  
text to display for email messages in the Inbox.  
Send & Receive  
3. Press  
and tap More > Settings, and choose  
from these options:  
Mail size limit: Set the maximum email file size for  
incoming messages.  
Account settings: Change the email account settings  
such as the name, email address, password, and  
description.  
Message format: Set email messages to display in  
HTML or plain text format.  
General settings  
Update schedule: Set the frequency with which to  
check for new email messages.  
Font size: Set the font size when reading email  
messages.  
Download past mail: Set how many days to  
download past email messages.  
Use signature: Select to append a signature to  
your outgoing email messages.  
Include file attachment: Set the size of email  
attachments that will be automatically  
downloaded with email messages.  
Signature: Set the signature for outgoing email  
messages.  
205  
   
Sync when roaming: Select to enable email  
synchronization when roaming.  
Deleting an Email Account  
1. Press  
and tap  
> Mail.  
Auto download message: Select to automatically  
download the email message as you scroll down  
the screen.  
2. Switch to the email account you want to delete. For  
Folder to sync: Select the folder to synchronize  
whenever you launch Mail.  
3. Press  
and tap More > Settings > Delete account.  
Reply with original text: Select to reply email  
messages with the original receive email.  
Adding the Mail Widget  
Add the Mail widget to view your POP3/IMAP or  
Exchange ActiveSync email messages on the Home  
screen.  
Always bcc me: Select to always send yourself a  
copy of all email messages that you send.  
Notification settings  
To learn how to add widgets, see “Customizing the  
Email notifications: Select to turn on email  
notifications on your device.  
Notification sound: Set the device to play a sound  
when a new email message arrives.  
Notification vibrate: Set the device to vibrate when  
a new email message arrives.  
Delete account: Tap to delete an email account.  
4. Press  
to save your changes.  
206  
     
Gmail  
When you first set up your device, make sure you sign  
into your Google Account to use Gmail. If you didn’t do  
so, go to the Accounts & sync setting to sign in. For  
You can also set up more than one Google Account on  
your device, and then switch between accounts in  
Gmail.  
Viewing Your Gmail Inbox  
All your received emails are delivered to your Inbox.  
1. Press  
and then tap  
inbox then opens.  
> Gmail. Your Gmail  
2. You can do the following on your Gmail Inbox:  
Archive or delete multiple conversations. Tap  
before the email or conversation. Then tap the  
onscreen buttons at the bottom to choose what to  
do with the selected messages or conversations.  
207  
     
Display drafts, sent messages, and other labels.   
Tap Inbox at the top left of the screen, and then  
tap another label (such as Sent, Drafts, or your  
created label) to view its messages and  
conversations.  
Note: If you want to send a carbon copy (Cc) or a blind  
carbon copy (Bcc) of the email to other recipients,  
press  
and then tap Add Cc/Bcc.  
4. Enter the email subject, and then compose your  
email.  
Switch to your other Gmail account. Tap the current  
account at the top right of the screen, and then  
tap another account you want to switch to.  
5. If you want to attach a picture, press  
tap Attach.  
and then  
Refresh the Inbox. Press  
, and then tap Refresh.  
6. Locate and then tap the picture you want to attach.  
7. After composing your message, tap  
.
Sending a New Email Message  
Note: While composing the message, tap  
to save it as a  
1. In the Gmail inbox, press  
and then tap  
draft. Or press  
to discard the message.  
Compose.  
2. If you’ve set up multiple Google Accounts on your  
device, choose which Gmail address you want to  
use for sending your email. Tap the box that shows  
your current Gmail address, and then tap another  
address that you want to use for sending.  
3. Enter the message recipient’s email address in the  
To field. If you are sending the email to several  
recipients, separate the email addresses with a  
comma.  
208  
Replying To or Forwarding An Email  
Message  
1. In the Gmail inbox, tap the email message or  
conversation.  
Google Talk  
Google Talk is Google’s instant messaging program. It  
lets you communicate with other people that also use  
Google Talk. If you signed in to your Google Account  
when you first set up your device, you are already  
signed in to Google Talk.  
2. To reply to the sender, tap  
. Or, tap and  
choose whether to Reply all or Forward.  
3. Do one of the following:  
If you selected Reply or Reply all, enter your reply  
Chatting with a Friend  
1. Press  
and tap  
> Talk.  
message.  
2. Tap a friend in the Friends list.  
If you selected Forward, specify the message  
recipients.  
3. Enter your message in the text box. You can also  
insert a smiley by pressing  
, and then tapping  
Note: Tap Respond inline if you want to interleave your new  
message with the received email. However, this  
removes any attachments or formatting in the original  
email.  
More > Insert smiley.  
4. Tap Send.  
5. While chatting, press  
options:  
and then tap any of these  
4. Tap  
.
Chat off record: Your Google Talk messages are  
stored in the Chats folder of your Gmail account.  
Tap this option if you don’t want to store your chat  
messages.  
Getting Help  
To find out more about using Gmail, press  
then tap More > Help. The Web browser will take you to  
the Google Mobile Help site.  
, and  
209  
     
Switch chats: If you have more than one chat  
going, tap this to switch chat with another friend.  
Changing Your Online Status and Picture  
1. Press  
and tap  
> Talk.  
Friends list: Return to the Friends list.  
2. In the Friends list, tap your name to open the Set  
Add to chat: Add another friend to your chat. The  
friend you invited and the friend your currently  
chatting with receive an invitation to a group chat.  
Each one who accepts the invitation joins the  
group chat.  
Status screen.  
3. Enter your new status message, or press  
close the onscreen keyboard and choose a  
custom status from the list.  
to  
End chat: End your current chat.  
4. Tap the online status beside your picture, and then  
More: Clear the chat history, insert a smiley, or  
view your friend’s contact details.  
select the status you want on the menu.  
5. Tap your picture, and then do one of the following:  
Tap Remove to remove your photo.  
Accepting a Chat Invitation  
When a friend sends you a Google Talk message, you  
receive a notification. Your friend’s entry in the Friends  
list turns active and displays the message.  
Tap Change to select another picture on the  
microSD card.  
6. Tap Done.  
Your online status, message, and picture appear in  
your contact’s Friends lists and in other apps where  
your Google Talk status are displayed.  
Do one of the following:  
In the Friends list, tap the friend who sent you the  
invitation to chat.  
Open the Notifications panel, and then tap the  
page 16.)  
210  
Making a Friend Popular  
Adding and Managing Friends  
1. Press  
and tap All friends.  
The Friends list is where you add and manage your  
friends in Google Talk. You can do the following in  
Google Talk’s Friends list.  
2. Press and hold a friend’s name, and then   
tap Always show friend.  
Inviting a Friend  
Blocking a Friend  
1. Press  
and tap Add friend.  
You can block a friend from sending you messages.  
When blocked, your friend is removed from the Friends  
list and is added to the Blocked friends list.  
2. Enter the Google Talk instant messaging ID or  
Gmail address of the friend you want to add.  
1. Press  
and tap All friends.  
3. Tap Send invitation.  
2. Press and hold a friend’s name, and then   
tap Block friend.  
Viewing All Friends  
Initially, only those friends that you often chat with — the  
most popular — are shown in the Friends list.  
Unblocking a Friend  
1. Press  
and tap More > Blocked.  
To view all your friends, press  
tap All friends.  
and   
2. Tap the name of the blocked friend, and then tap OK.  
To view only friends that you often chat with,   
press and tap Most popular.  
Viewing All Invited Friends  
Press  
and tap More > Invites. Friends who have  
not yet accepted your invitation are listed on the  
screen.  
211  
Changing the Settings or Signing Out  
Downloading Applications and  
Games From Android Market  
1. Press  
and tap  
> Talk.  
and then tap:  
2. In the Friends list, press  
Android Market™ is the place to go to find new apps for  
your device. Choose from a wide variety of free and  
paid apps ranging from productivity apps to games.  
When you find an app you want, you can easily  
download and install it on your device with just a few  
taps of your finger.  
Settings to change the app and notification  
settings.  
Sign out to sign out from Google Talk.  
To access Android Market, you must first connect to the  
Internet using your device’s Wi-Fi, Sprint 4G, or data  
connection and sign in to your Google Account.  
Important: Sprint’s policies often do not apply to third-party  
applications. Third-party applications may access  
your personal information or require Sprint to  
disclose your customer information to the third-  
party application provider. To find out how a third-  
party application will collect, access, use, or  
disclose your personal information, check the  
application provider’s policies, which can usually  
be found on their website. If you aren’t  
comfortable with the third-party application’s  
policies, don’t use the application.  
212  
       
Under a category, you can further filter the  
applications by Top paid, Top free, or Just in.  
Finding and Installing an Application  
When you install apps from Android Market and use  
them on your device, they may require access to your  
personal information (such as your location, contact  
data, and more) or access to certain functions or  
settings of your device. Download and install only apps  
that you trust.  
Browse applications recommended by Sprint.   
Tap Sprint, and then scroll through the list.  
Search for an app. Tap  
home screen, enter the name or type of app  
you’re looking for, and then tap  
on the Android Market  
.
Note: You need a Google Checkout account to purchase  
items on Android Market. See “Creating a Google  
Checkout account if you do not have one.  
1. Press  
and tap  
> Market.  
2. When you open Android Market for the first time,  
the Terms of Service window will appear.   
Tap Accept to continue.  
3. Do any of the following to find an application:  
Browse through featured applications. Scroll  
through the list of featured applications when you  
open Android Market.  
Browse applications by categories. Tap Apps or  
Games, and then tap a category.   
213  
4. When you find the application that you like, tap it  
Opening an Installed Application  
and read its description and user reviews.  
Do one of the following:  
WARNING: Be cautious when downloading apps that have  
access to your device’s functions or a significant  
amount of your data. You’re responsible for the  
results of using downloaded applications on your  
device.  
If you see  
on the status bar, open the  
Notifications panel, and then tap the application.  
Press  
and tap  
> Market. Press  
and tap  
My apps. On the My apps screen, tap the  
application.  
5. To download or purchase the application, tap  
FREE (for free applications) or the price button  
under Buy (for paid applications).  
Press  
and tap  
. On the All apps screen,  
slide to the Downloaded tab (  
the application.  
), and then tap  
6. If you agree to the conditions, tap OK to begin  
downloading and installing the app.  
Uninstalling an Application  
If you selected a paid application, after tapping OK,  
you’re redirected to the Google Checkout screen to  
pay for the application before it’s downloaded to  
your device.  
You can uninstall any application that you have  
downloaded and installed from Android Market.  
1. Press  
and tap  
> Market.  
2. Press  
and tap My apps.  
Note: You can uninstall an app for a refund within a limited  
time after your purchase. To know more about the  
refund policy for paid apps, please visit the Android  
3. Tap the application you want to uninstall, and then  
tap Uninstall.  
4. When prompted, tap OK.  
5. Choose the reason for removing the application,  
and then tap OK.  
214  
Creating a Google Checkout Account  
Getting Help  
You must have a Google Checkout account associated  
with your Google Account to purchase items from  
Android Market.  
If you need help or have questions about Android  
Market, press  
, and then tap Help. The Web browser  
will take you to the Android Market Help site.  
Do one of the following:  
Stocks  
On your computer, go to checkout.google.com to  
create a Google Checkout account.  
Use the Stocks application to get the latest stock  
updates for stock quotes and market indices you  
follow.  
– or –  
The first time you use your device to buy an item from  
Android Market, you’re prompted to enter your billing  
information to set up a Google Checkout account.  
1. Press  
and tap  
> Stocks. (You may need to  
scroll down the screen to see the icon.)  
WARNING: When you’ve used Google Checkout once to  
purchase an application from Android Market, the  
device remembers your password, so you don’t  
need to enter it the next time. For this reason, you  
should secure your device to prevent others from  
using it without your permission. (For more  
2. Do any of the following:  
Tap an item to view its information.  
Tap  
to update the stock information.  
Tap  
to add a stock quote or stock market  
index.  
To change the stock list order, press  
tap Edit. Press and hold at the end of the item  
, and then  
you want to move, drag it to its new position and  
then tap Done.  
215  
       
3. When you’ve selected a particular stock quote or  
Adding a Stock Quote or   
Stock Market Index  
stock market index, you can:  
View an item’s trade information as well as its  
price chart for a specific period.  
1. Press  
2. Enter the stock quote or stock market index on the  
text box and tap  
and tap  
> Stocks.  
Tap the time buttons below the chart to view up to  
a year of an item’s past trade information.  
.
3. On the results list, tap the stock quote or stock  
market index you want to add.  
Deleting a Stock Quote or Stock Market Index  
1. Press  
2. Press  
3. Tap  
and tap  
> Stocks.  
, and then tap Edit.  
before the item you want to delete, and  
then tap Done.  
216  
Changing Update Schedule and   
Adding the Stocks Widget  
Color Settings  
1. Press  
and tap  
> Widget > Stocks.  
Note: Downloading stock information automatically may incur  
2. Choose the widget style, and then tap Select.  
additional data connection fees  
3. Drag the widget to a blank space on the Home  
screen, and then release.  
In the Stocks application, press  
and then tap  
Settings. Do any of the following:  
Viewing Your Stocks on the Lock Screen  
Display the stocks and stock market information you’re  
following right on the device’s lock screen.  
Update when opened: Update the stock  
information every time you open the Stocks  
application.  
Scheduled sync: Set automatic downloads of  
stock information.  
1. Press  
and tap  
> Lock screen.  
2. Slide your finger left until the Stocks lock screen is  
selected, and then tap Apply.  
Update schedule: Choose a time interval for  
checking updates.  
3. Briefly press  
to put the device in standby  
again to  
Set color for price raise: Change the color for  
displaying stock price increases to either red or  
green, depending on what’s being used in your  
country.  
mode, and then briefly press  
display the Lock screen. Your stocks and stock  
market information display on the screen.  
217  
   
Using Weather  
Weather  
1. Press  
and tap  
> Weather. (You may need to  
You can use the Weather application and widget to  
check the current, upcoming, hourly, and daily weather  
forecast.  
scroll down the screen to see the icon.)  
2. Do any of the following:  
Swipe your finger up or down the screen or   
In addition to your current location, you can also view  
weather forecasts for other cities around the globe.  
Your settings in the Weather application also control  
the weather information that is shown in the Clock and  
Calendar.  
tap  
to check the weather in other cities (if  
available). To add another city, see “Adding a  
Tap  
and then tap  
to update the weather  
information at any time.  
Important: To automatically update your current location's  
weather in the Weather app and widget as well as  
Clock and Calendar:  
Tap  
to view the weather forecast for the next  
24 hours.  
Your device must be connected to the Internet.  
Tap  
and then tap Hourly to view an hourly  
Turn location services on your device so that  
you’ll be able to check your current location’s  
weather on the HTC Clock widget, Weather  
application, and the Weather widget.  
weather forecast chart.  
Tap  
and then tap 5-day to view the weather  
forecast for the next five days.  
Press  
>
, tap Settings > Location, and  
Tap More details online at the bottom of the  
Weather screen to see more weather details on  
the Web.  
then select the Use wireless networks check  
box.  
218  
     
Arranging and Deleting Cities  
1. On the Weather screen, press  
, and then tap Edit.  
2. Do one of the following:  
To move a city, press and hold  
at the end of  
the city name and then drag it to its new position.  
To delete a city, tap  
before the city you want to  
delete.  
3. Tap Done.  
Changing Weather Options  
1. On the Weather screen, press  
and tap Settings.  
2. Select the options you want:  
Select the Update when opened check box to  
refresh weather updates every time you open the  
Weather application.  
Adding a City  
1. On the Weather screen, press  
Select the Scheduled sync check box to  
automatically download weather updates after a  
period of time.  
and tap Add.  
2. Enter the location you want to add on the text box.  
As you enter text, the list is filtered to show the  
possible locations based on the letters you entered.  
To set an auto update schedule, tap Update  
schedule and choose a schedule.  
3. Tap the city to select it.  
219  
 
Tap Temperature scale to choose whether to  
display weather in Celsius or Fahrenheit.  
News Feeds  
Sound effects Select whether to play sound  
effects related to the weather conditions.  
Don’t get left behind with yesterday’s stories. Use the  
News application to subscribe to news feeds that cover  
breaking news, sports, top blogs, and more. You can  
also get updates based on specific keywords.  
About the Weather Widget  
Subscribing to News Channels  
Use the Weather widget to instantly check weather  
forecasts of your current location and other cities  
without having to open the Weather application.  
1. Press  
and tap  
> News.   
News opens in the All items screen.  
2. Tap All items, and then tap Add feeds.  
3. Do one of the following:  
The Weather widget comes in different looks and  
styles. You can add this widget to the Home screen, if  
it’s not yet added.  
Tap a category such as Blogs or Business to  
select from popular news feeds.  
To find out how you can add a widget, see  
Tap Search more to search for a specific keyword  
or a feed URL.  
4. After selecting the channel or channels you want  
to subscribe to, tap Add.  
Tip: To manually check for updates, on the All items screen,  
press , and then tap Refresh.  
220  
       
Searching News Stories  
to share the story via Google reader share,  
message (link to the story only), or email.  
Easily find stories that interest you by entering a search  
keyword. Stories on your subscribed channels that  
contain the keyword are displayed making it easier to  
find the story you want.  
to write a comment about the story.  
and  
to go to the previous or next story in  
the channel.  
1. Press  
and tap  
> News.  
to tag the story to another channel or  
category you’ve subscribed.  
2. Tap  
and enter the keyword. The stories that  
contain the keyword display on the screen.  
5. If you want to read the whole story, tap Read full  
article. This opens the story in the Web browser.   
page 188 to learn how to navigate on the Web  
page.  
Reading a Story  
1. Press  
and tap  
> News.  
2. Tap All items > Subscriptions, and then tap a  
channel.  
Changing News Settings  
3. Scroll through the list of stories, and then tap a  
1. Press  
and tap  
> News.  
story to read it.  
2. Press  
, and then tap Settings.  
4. While reading a story, you can tap:  
Like if you like the story.  
Accounts: Select the Google account you want  
News to sync with.  
to star the story as a favorite. To access your  
favorite stories, press to return to the All items  
screen, and then tap All items > My items >   
Update when opened: Update the content of the  
channels you’ve subscribed to every time you  
open the News app.  
Starred items.  
221  
News content: Choose how to read news stories  
by default: whether as a summary or as a full  
Web page article.  
Sprint Hotspot  
Sprint Hotspot turns your device into a wireless router  
and shares your device’s data connection (1xRTT,  
Sprint 3G, or Sprint 4G) with as many as eight  
computers or mobile devices using Wi-Fi. When you  
open Sprint Hotspot, your device creates a secure   
Wi-Fi network that you can connect to with your  
computer and access the Internet.  
Mobile view: If you’ve selected to view the news  
content as a Web page article, choose to display  
Web page articles optimized for mobile viewing.  
Adding the News Widget  
Read snippets of stories that you have subscribed to  
right on the Home screen.  
To use your device as a wireless router, make sure that  
your device has an active connection with the Sprint  
1xRTT data network, the Sprint 3G network, or the  
Sprint 4G network. (For more information, see  
1. Press  
and tap  
> Widget > News.  
2. Select the widget style, and then tap Select.  
3. Select the channel whose stories you want to  
display on the widget, and then tap Select.  
To connect to your device’s Wi-Fi network, you need a  
computer with built in Wi-Fi or a Wi-Fi adapter.  
4. Drag the widget to a blank space on a screen, and  
then release.  
222  
     
Setting Up Sprint Hotspot  
Connecting Your Computer to Sprint  
Hotspot  
1. Press  
and tap  
> Sprint Hotspot.  
2. Tap OK on the introduction screen.  
After setting up your device as a wireless router,  
connect your computer to your device’s Sprint Hotspot  
and access the Internet.  
3. Enter a new name in the Router name (SSID) text  
box, or use the default router name.  
For a Windows Vista or Windows 7 computer  
4. Select a network security method from the Security  
list. If you selected WEP, WPA (TKIP), or WPA2  
(AES), enter a network key (password) in the  
Password box.  
1. Click Start > Connect To.  
2. In the Connect to a network dialog box, select the  
Sprint Hotspot name (or SSID), and then click  
Connect.  
5. Select the Sprint Mobile Hotspot check box at the  
top of the screen to turn on the wireless router.  
Note: Your device’s wireless network may not show up in the  
list of available networks immediately. Wait for a  
moment and then refresh the list to see the wireless  
network.  
When Sprint Hotspot is active and is ready to share its  
3G connection, the 3G hotspot icon ( ) appears in  
the status bar. When Sprint Hotspot is active and is  
ready to share its Sprint 4G connection, the 4G hotspot  
icon ( ) appears in the status bar.  
3. Enter the network key (if any) that you used when  
setting up Sprint Hotspot, and then click Connect.  
4. Click Close.  
223  
   
Select the Allowed users only check box if you  
want to allow only specific devices or computers  
to connect to Sprint Hotspot on your device.  
For a Windows XP computer  
1. Click Start > Connect To > Wireless Network  
Connection.  
When you select this option, this icon  
appears  
in the status bar every time a new device or  
computer attempts to connect to Sprint Hotspot.  
To allow connection, tap Allow on the Manage  
users screen.  
2. In the Choose a Wireless Network dialog box, select  
the Sprint Hotspot name (or SSID), and then click  
Connect.  
Note: Your device’s wireless network may not show up in the  
list of available networks immediately. Wait for a  
moment and then refresh the list to see the wireless  
network.  
Max. connections: Tap to set the maximum  
number of devices and computers that can  
connect to and use Sprint Hotspot.  
Allowed users: Lists the MAC addresses of  
computers and devices that you have allowed  
connection to Sprint Hotspot on your device.  
3. Enter the network key (if any) that you used when  
setting up Sprint Hotspot, and then click Connect.  
Block users: Lists the MAC addresses of  
computers and devices that are not allowed to  
connect to Sprint Hotspot on your device. Tap an  
entry to allow connection to Sprint Hotspot.  
Managing Sprint Hotspot  
You can set the number of computers or devices or  
allow only specific devices to connect and use Sprint  
Hotspot to connect to the Internet.  
1. Press  
and tap  
> Sprint Hotspot.  
2. Tap OK on the introduction screen.  
3. Tap Manage users, and then set the following  
options:  
224  
 
Turning Off Sprint Hotspot  
Using Your Device as a Modem  
1. Press  
>
and then tap Settings >   
Get online with your notebook or desktop computer at  
any time, using your device’s data connection. For  
information on setting up and using the data  
Wireless & network.  
2. Clear the Sprint Hotspot check box.  
Adding a Sprint Hotspot Widget  
Notes: You need to install HTC Sync before you can use your  
details.  
Add the Sprint Hotspot widget to the Home screen to  
make it faster for you to turn Sprint Hotspot on or off.  
To learn how to add widgets, see “Customizing the  
Make sure that your device has an active connection  
with the Sprint 1xRTT data network or the Sprint 3G  
network. For more information, see “Getting Started  
1. Connect the device to the computer using the  
provided USB cable.  
2. On the Connect to PC screen, select USB tethering,  
and then tap Done.  
When you are using your device as a modem, the USB  
mass storage feature is disabled, and you will not be  
able to use HTC Sync.  
225  
   
2. Connect the device to the computer using the  
Connecting Your Device to the  
Internet Through a Computer  
(Internet Pass-through)  
provided USB cable.  
3. On the Connect to PC screen, select Internet pass-  
through, and then tap Done.  
If you don’t have a data plan for your device or you  
don’t have access to a Wi-Fi network, you can still go  
online on your device by using your computer’s  
Internet connection.  
Data Services FAQs  
How will I know when my device is ready for data service?  
Your user name (for example, [email protected])  
will be displayed when you access Settings > About  
phone > Phone identity > Current username.  
Notes: Before you can use your computer as a modem,  
you’ll need to install HTC Sync on your computer. See  
How do I sign in for the first time?  
You are automatically signed in to access data services  
when you turn on your device.  
Make sure that your device has an active connection  
with the Sprint 1xRTT data network or the Sprint 3G  
network. For more information, see “Getting Started  
How do I know when my device is connected to data  
services?  
1. Make sure your computer is connected to the  
Internet.  
Your device automatically connects when you use data  
service or an incoming message arrives. You will also  
see the  
or  
indicator.  
Important: Sprint recommends that you turn off your local  
network’s firewall. Also, if your computer connects  
to the Internet via PPP (for example, dial-up, xDSL,  
or VPN), Internet Pass-through will only support  
TCP protocol.  
Can I make calls and use data services at the same time?  
Depending on the current configuration of your device,  
you may be able to make calls and use data services  
at the same time.  
226  
     
With DDTM off (default, configured in Call settings):  
When is my data connection active?  
Your connection is active when data is being  
transferred. Outgoing calls are allowed; incoming calls  
go directly to voicemail. When active, the  
indicator animates on your device’s display screen.  
If you are using the 3G data network, when a voice  
call comes in, data transmission is suspended and  
will automatically resume when you complete your  
voice call.  
or  
When is my data connection dormant?  
If you are on a voice call, you will not be able to  
If your device receives no data for ten seconds, the  
connection goes dormant. When the connection is  
dormant, you can make and receive voice calls. (The  
connection may become active again quickly.)  
If your device receives no data for an extended period  
of time, the connection will terminate.  
establish a 3G data connection.  
With DDTM on (configured in Call settings):  
You cannot use voice and data services  
simultaneously. If you receive a call while data  
service is active, your device will forward the call to  
voicemail. You can place an outgoing call at any  
time, but it will interrupt any in-progress data session.  
Your device will not automatically resume an  
interrupted data session.  
Can I sign out of data services?  
You can sign out without turning off your device;  
however, you will not be able to browse the Web or use  
other data services (unless you establish a Wi-Fi  
connection.) While signed out, you can still place or  
receive phone calls, check voicemail, and use other  
voice services. You may sign in again at any time. To  
sign out, go to Settings > Wireless & networks and clear  
the Mobile network check box.  
With DDTM off or on:  
You can make or receive a voice call while you are  
connected to the 4G data network. Incoming calls  
will not disrupt or suspend your data connection.  
227  
 
Sprint TV & Movies  
3C. Entertainment:  
TV and Music  
Sprint TV & Movies gives you the ability to listen to audio  
clips and to view video clips right from your device’s  
display. Watch live TV and catch up on episodes of  
your favorite shows – anywhere on the Nationwide  
Sprint Network.  
Note: Sprint TV coverage not available everywhere. Content  
and lineup subject to change. Select channels also  
available for casual usage. Visit sprint.com/tvguide for  
more information.  
Your Sprint TV Channel and Movies  
Options  
The Sprint TV & Movies application offers a wide  
variety of accessible channels and movies.  
Subscription options include comprehensive basic  
packages as well as a full menu of “a la carte”  
channels and movies. Visit sprint.com for more  
information on channels, movies, and pricing.  
Note: Available categories and content are subject to change.  
228  
       
You can also tap the Live TV tab at the top of the  
screen to select from available channels.  
Tap On Demand to select from a list of TV shows  
Watching TV and Movies  
1. Press  
and tap  
> Sprint TV & Movies.  
arranged conveniently into categories.  
Tap Movies to select from a list of movies that you  
can stream on your device.  
Tap Shop to view available channel packages  
and to order subscriptions.  
Note: The first time you access a channel, the system will  
prompt you to purchase access (unless the channel  
doesn’t have a monthly fee). Select Subscribe to  
purchase access, or select Preview to view a preview  
of the selected channel.  
Note: You must turn off Wi-Fi before you can view Sprint TV. If  
you launch Sprint TV and have Wi-Fi enabled, a  
message will appear onscreen asking you if you want  
to turn off Wi-Fi.  
3. Tap the live TV, on-demand show, or movie that  
you’ve selected. The clip will automatically load  
and begin playing.  
4. While watching a clip, tap the screen to surf to a  
different channel. The Live Channels list at the  
bottom of the screen will tell you which channel  
you are watching as well as other channels that  
you have access to. Slide your finger on the screen  
to scroll through the channels. Once you find a  
channel, show, or movie that you want to watch,  
scroll to it and then tap it.  
2. On the Sprint TV & Movies home screen, do one of  
the following:  
Slide your finger left or right on the screen to  
browse through featured shows, channels, and  
movies. Tap an item to view more information.  
Tap an icon on the Live Channels section at the  
bottom of the screen to start viewing live TV.  
229  
4. Are the videos that I’m viewing “live” videos?  
It depends on the content provider. Some of the  
channels available through Sprint TV & Movies  
stream live content. Others provide media on  
demand with video and audio clips that are  
refreshed throughout the day, but those are not  
“live.”  
TV FAQs  
1. Will I know if I’m receiving an incoming call while I’m  
viewing or listening to a media clip?  
No. All incoming calls will roll into voicemail while  
you are playing a clip. If the caller leaves a voicemail,  
you will see the voicemail icon on the screen.  
2. How long are the clips? Will I know the estimated  
time it will take to play the clip prior to accessing it?  
Once you have selected a channel, you will see a  
listing of the available clips, with each clip’s length  
displayed after the clip’s title. In general, a clip’s  
duration will depend on the story or content being  
provided, and can be fairly short or as long as a  
few minutes.  
5. After purchasing access to an Available Channel for a  
monthly fee, do I receive any confirmation? That is,  
how do I know it has been purchased?  
The next time you access the channel, you bypass  
the Preview/Purchase dialog box and go directly to  
the available content.  
6. If I don’t subscribe to a data plan, will I still be able to  
view the multimedia clips?  
Yes. For service access charges, please consult  
your Sprint service plan or visit sprint.com.  
3. Can I access a clip wherever I am, as long as I have  
my device?  
As long as you are on the Nationwide Sprint  
Network, you will have access to the audio and  
video clips.  
7. What does it mean when the video pauses and I see  
the word “loading” at the bottom of the screen?  
This happens when the device is loading the data  
necessary to play the clip. It typically occurs when  
there is heavy traffic on the network.  
Note: Sprint TV service does not work while roaming off of  
the Nationwide Sprint Network or where service is  
unavailable.  
230  
 
8. How can I cancel service if I decide I don’t want it?  
To cancel your Sprint TV service, visit sprint.com  
and sign on to My Sprint with your account number  
and password. From this page, you have the ability  
to cancel the service or any channels to which you  
subscribe.  
10. Can I surf to a different channel while I am playing a  
clip?  
Yes. While you are playing a clip, tap the screen to  
surf to a different channel. The Live Channels list at  
the bottom of the screen will tell you which channel  
you are watching as well as other channels that  
you have access to. Slide your finger on the screen  
to scroll through the channels. Once you find a  
channel, show, or movie that you want to watch,  
scroll to it and then tap it.  
9. If I put on my stereo headset and insert it into the  
device’s headset jack, can I turn off the screen while I  
am playing an audio (or video) clip without  
interrupting the clip?  
Yes. When you insert your stereo headset into the  
device’s headset jack, the device automatically  
goes into “headset mode,” allowing you to turn the  
screen off and continue playing the clip.   
(Likewise, if your device is in “headset mode,” a  
phone call will not disconnect when you turn off  
the screen.)  
231  
Purchasing and Downloading Music  
Music - MP3 Store  
Now that you’re in the store, you can shop for songs to  
purchase and download to your device’s microSD  
card.  
Amazon MP3 lets you preview, purchase, download,  
and listen to over a million songs right on your device.  
MP3 Store provides you with one-touch access to  
digital music from amazon.com. Amazon has more than  
6 million DRM-free MP3 tracks you can purchase and  
download to your device.  
1. From the Amazon MP3 store, tap an option to  
browse available songs:  
Bestsellers displays the bestselling albums and  
songs.  
Important: You can download MP3s using Sprint 4G or Wi-Fi  
connection. You can browse and preview songs  
using any data connection.  
New Releases displays newly-released albums  
and songs.  
Browse by Genre lets you search songs or albums  
by musical genres.  
Accessing the MP3 Store  
Search Amazon MP3 gives you the option of  
searching for specific songs, albums, or artists.  
Just use the keyboard to enter your search criteria  
Press  
and tap  
> Amazon MP3.  
The first time you open Amazon MP3, you will be  
ask to select Store or Player. Tap Store.  
in the text box and tap  
.
2. On the list of albums and songs, do one of the  
following:  
Tap the price at the right side of the album or  
song to purchase it and then tap Buy.   
232  
   
(If there is no microSD card installed or if there is  
not enough free memory space on the card, you  
will see an alert.)  
Sprint Radio  
In addition to the Amazon MP3, Sprint offers a variety of  
musical options through Sprint Radio. These includes  
access to 100+ radio stations with the best in music,  
talk, and news. You can also select music from a  
variety of genres such as urban, rock, pop, hip-hop,  
and Latin.  
Tap a song name to play a preview.  
Tap an album to view the songs in it and then tap  
a song to play a preview. You can purchase  
individual songs in an album.  
3. Enter the email address and password that you  
1. Press  
and tap  
> Sprint Radio.  
use to access Amazon, and tap Sign-in.  
2. Tap Sprint Radio, and then tap a category.  
Note: If you want access to more music, music videos, and  
talk and news programs, tap Sprint Radio Extra to  
begin your 24-hour free trial. Take note that this is a paid  
service.  
3. After you’ve selected a station or music genre that  
you like, tap it to start playback.  
233  
   
Listening to Music  
1
11  
10  
9
Enjoy listening to songs and music on your device  
using the Music application.  
Note: You need to copy music files to your storage card first  
to use the Music application to play music. To find out  
how to copy files to the storage card, see “Your  
Playing Music  
Press  
and tap  
> Music. Music opens in the  
Now playing screen. Tap the onscreen icons to  
control music playback, select a song to play,  
repeat songs, and more.  
2
3
Notes: Swipe your finger left or right across the screen to go  
to the next or previous music album.  
Press the volume up or down button to adjust the  
playback volume.  
4
5
6
7
8
1. Tap to play music on another device using  
Connected media. For more information, see  
2. Progress bar. Press and drag your finger across  
the progress bar to jump to any part of the song.  
234  
     
3. Tap Recommended to check out featured albums  
at Amazon MP3 store. Tap amazon MP3 to open  
the Amazon MP3 store. For more information about  
the Amazon MP3 store, see “Music - MP3 Store”  
Playing Music from the Lock Screen  
When you are playing music and the screen turns off, you  
can control the music playback right from the lock screen  
when you “wake up” the device by pressing  
.
If you only see the album art, slide your finger across  
the screen to flip the album art and display the  
playback controls.  
4. Go to the Library.  
5. Go to the previous song in the Now playing list.  
6. Pause or resume playing the song.  
7. Go to the next song in the Now playing list.  
8. Switch between showing the Now playing list and  
Now playing screen. You can rearrange songs in  
the Now playing list.  
9. Turn shuffle on or off. (Shuffle is off when the  
button is gray.)  
10. Cycle through the repeat modes: repeat all songs,  
repeat current song, don’t repeat.  
11. Enjoy listening to your music with SRS. Or, if you’re  
using a wired headset, you can also choose from  
various preset equalizer settings. (SRS and  
equalizer are not available when you’re using a  
Bluetooth stereo headset.)  
235  
Creating Playlists  
Note: You can also pause music playback directly from the  
Notifications panel.  
Personalize your music experience by creating music  
playlists. Make a playlist containing just your favorite  
songs or create one to match your mood for the day.  
You can make as many playlists as you like.  
Browsing Music in the Library  
1. Tap  
at the bottom  
left corner of the Now  
playing screen or Now  
playing list to go to the  
Library.  
In the Library, your  
music is organized into  
different categories  
such as Artists and  
Albums. Select a  
1. Press  
and tap  
> Music.  
2. Tap  
to go to the Library.  
3. In the Library, tap or slide on the bottom row to go  
to the Playlists category.  
4. Press  
and then tap Add a playlist.  
5. Enter a playlist name, and then tap Add songs to  
playlist.  
category by tapping  
one of the tabs at the  
bottom of the screen.  
6. Tap or slide on the bottom row to change among  
the different categories. If you go to the Songs  
category, you can see a complete list of songs on  
your microSD card.  
2. Tap a song in a  
category to play it.   
The Now playing list is  
updated with the song  
list from your selected category.  
7. Select the check boxes of songs you want to add  
to the playlist and then tap Add.  
8. Tap Save.  
Note: You can add, remove, or rearrange the tabs in the Library.  
236  
 
Playing the Songs in a Playlist  
Tip: While playing a song, press  
and then tap Add to  
playlist to add the current song to a playlist.  
1. In the Library, tap or drag on the bottom row to go  
to the Playlists category.  
To rearrange the songs in a playlist:  
2. Tap a playlist to open it.  
1. In the Library, tap or slide your finger on the bottom  
row to go to the Playlists category.  
3. Tap the first song or any song in the playlist.  
2. Tap a playlist to open it.  
When you tap a song in the list to play it, the Now playing  
list is updated with the song list from your playlist.  
3. Press  
and then tap Change order.  
Managing Your Playlists  
4. Press and hold  
want to move. When the row is highlighted, drag it  
to its new position, and then release.  
at the end of the song title you  
After creating a playlist, you can add more songs to it,  
rearrange their order, and more.  
5. Tap Done.  
To add songs to a playlist:  
To delete a song in a playlist:  
1. In the Library, tap or slide your finger on the bottom  
row to go to the Playlists category.  
1. In the Library, tap or slide your finger on the bottom  
row to go to the Playlists category.  
2. Tap a playlist to open it.  
2. Tap a playlist to open it.  
3. Press  
and then tap Add songs.  
3. Press  
and then tap Remove songs.  
4. Go to the Songs category or any other category.  
4. Select the songs you want to delete and then tap  
Remove.  
5. Select the songs you want to add to the playlist  
and then tap Add.  
237  
To delete a playlist:  
Contact ringtone to assign the song as ring tone  
for your contacts. You need to choose the  
contacts you want to associate the song with in  
the next screen.  
1. In the Library, tap or slide your finger on the bottom  
row to go to the Playlists category.  
2. Press  
and then tap Delete playlists.  
Trim the ringtone to trim the song before you set it  
as the device or contact ring tone. For more  
information, see “Trimming an MP3 Ring Tone.”  
3. Select the playlists to delete and then tap Delete.  
Setting a Song as a Ring Tone  
You can select a song from the Music application’s  
Library and set it as your device’s ring tone or as a ring  
tone for a specific contact.  
6. To confirm that the song was added as a ring tone  
press  
>
and then tap Settings.  
7. Tap Sound > Phone ringtone. The song should be  
in the ringtone list and selected.  
1. Press  
and tap  
> Music.  
Trimming an MP3 Ring Tone  
2. Tap  
to go to the Library.  
The Music app has a built-in ring tone trimmer. You  
can trim an MP3 song and set a part of it as your ring  
tone.  
3. In the Library, select the song that you want to use  
as ring tone, and then play it back.  
4. On the Now playing screen, press  
and then tap  
1. On the Now playing screen, press  
and then tap  
More > Set as ringtone.  
More > Set as ringtone > Trim the ringtone.  
5. In the Set as ringtone options menu, tap:  
Phone ringtone to set the song as your device’s  
2. Use the onscreen controls to trim your ring tone.  
ring tone.  
238  
 
3. After you’ve finished trimming, tap Set as. Then  
choose whether to set the trimmed song as your  
Phone ringtone or Contact ringtone.  
Sending Music Using Bluetooth  
You can select a song from the Music application’s  
Library and send it to another phone or to a computer  
using Bluetooth.  
1. Press  
and tap  
> Music.  
2. Tap  
to go to the Library.  
3. In the Library, select the song that you want send.  
4. On the Playback screen, press  
More > Share > Bluetooth.  
and then tap  
In the next few steps, you’ll be asked to turn on  
Bluetooth on your device and connect to the receiving  
Bluetooth device so the music can be sent. For more  
150.  
Drag the two trim sliders  
approximately to the part where you want the ring  
tone to begin and end.  
Tap to more precisely set the start and end  
points of the ring tone.  
The markers show where the ring  
tone starts and ends.  
239  
 
Before you share media through the network:  
Finding Music Videos on YouTube  
You can find music videos of the song you’re listening  
to on YouTube. It’s simple. On the Now playing screen,  
Connect your device to the network via Wi-Fi. To find  
out how to connect to a Wi-Fi network, see  
just press  
and then tap Find videos.  
Connect the TV or speakers to the network. Check  
the documentation that came with your TV or  
speakers to find out how to do this.  
Using the Music Widget  
You can use the Music widget to play music right from  
your Home screen. To find out how you can add this  
widget to your Home screen, see “Customizing the  
Connected Media  
Sharing photos, videos, and music with a bigger circle  
of friends is easy on your home network. Simply  
connect your device to the network and instantly show  
your captured photos and videos on a big TV, or start  
streaming your favorite music tracks on hi-fi speakers —  
all via DLNA®. For more information about DLNA, visit  
Sharing Media on Your Home Network  
1. Press  
and tap  
> Gallery or Music.  
2. Locate the photo, video, or song that you want to  
share, and then tap it.  
240  
 
3. While viewing the photo or playing the video or  
music, press and then tap Select player.  
Sharing Media on Your Device  
After you’ve set up Connected media, you can also  
allow other devices on your local network to access,  
display or play back media stored on your device’s  
microSD card. For example, on your connected TV, you  
can browse content on your device and then stream it  
directly on the big screen.  
4. Choose the device on your network where you  
want to play the media.  
5. Once connected to the other device, your device  
opens up the Controller screen where you can tap:  
Play the media on the other device.  
1. Connect your device and the accessing device  
(such as a TV) on the same local network using  
Wi-Fi. To find out how to connect your device to a  
Pause the photo slideshow, music or video  
playback.  
Display the previous photo or play the  
previous music track.  
Display the next photo or play the next music  
track.  
2. On your device, press  
Media Share.  
and tap  
>   
Shuffle your music playlist.  
3. If this is your first time to using Media Share, tap  
Done on the Welcome screen, and then tap Done  
on the instruction screen.  
Select a repeat mode for music tracks.  
Tap to turn on SRS while playing music.  
Show available media that you can share.  
Connect to another player on the network.  
4. Do either of the following on the Media Share  
settings screen.  
Change the media server name.  
Select the types of media files you would like to  
share.  
241  
 
5. Select the Share my media files check box to start  
Media Share.  
Listening to the Radio  
6. Tap Set shared folders, and select which folders  
Listen to your favorite FM radio station on your device.  
you want to share on the local network.  
Notes: You will first need to connect a wired headset to the  
audio jack of your device to use FM Radio. FM Radio  
uses the stereo headset as the FM radio antenna.  
7. On your TV or computer, navigate to the media  
server name (that is the media server name you’ve  
assigned to your device) and start accessing and  
playing media files.  
A wired headset is not included with your device. It  
must be purchased separately.  
8. To stop sharing media on your device, press  
,
tap > Media Share, and then clear the Share my  
Using FM Radio  
media files check box.  
1. Press  
and tap  
> FM Radio.  
2. The first time you launch the FM Radio, it  
automatically scans for available FM stations,  
saves them as presets, and plays the first FM  
station found. Press  
to stop the auto-scan.  
242  
   
Tap  
-0.1 MHz or  
+0.1 MHz.  
Tap  
to fine-tune the radio frequency by   
to fine-tune the radio frequency by  
to add a preset name for the current  
station you are tuned into.  
Press the volume buttons on the side of the  
device to adjust the volume.  
To repeat scanning and saving of FM stations,  
press  
, and then tap Scan & Save.  
Press  
to mute the sound or to change the  
sound output to Mono or Stereo. You can also  
switch the sound output between the Speaker  
and Headset.  
Adding Station Names  
1. Press  
and tap  
> FM Radio.  
3. On the FM Radio screen, you can:  
Tap to view the All presets list, and then select  
a station you want to listen to.  
2. Tune in to an FM station, and then tap  
.
3. Enter a station name for the selected FM station,  
and then tap Save.  
Tap  
to go to the previous available FM station,  
to go to the next available FM station.  
or  
Drag the slider ( ) to tune in to a frequency on  
the FM band.  
243  
 
Closing or Turning Off FM Radio  
Opening YouTube  
You can continue listening to the radio while using  
other apps on your device or close the FM Radio app  
completely.  
Press  
and tap  
> YouTube. (You may need to  
scroll down the screen to see the icon.)  
To close the FM Radio screen, press  
. FM Radio  
continues to run in the background. To go back to  
the FM Radio screen, open the Notifications panel,  
and then tap FM Radio.  
On the FM Radio screen, tap  
on the upper right  
corner of the FM Radio screen to turn off FM Radio.  
YouTube  
YouTube is an online video streaming service that  
allows you to view videos that have been uploaded by  
YouTube members.  
Notes: You do not need a YouTube account to browse and  
view videos. However, to use all the features of  
YouTube (such as viewing “My account”), you must  
create a YouTube account from your computer and  
sign in to that account from your device.  
A list of featured, most popular, and most discussed  
videos appear on the screen.  
You must have an active data, Sprint 4G, or Wi-Fi  
connection to access YouTube.  
244  
     
Watching Videos  
Sharing Videos  
1. On the YouTube screen, do one of the following:  
Tap a video to play it.  
You can share a video by sending its link to your  
contacts.  
1. While watching a video, tap  
> Share.  
Press  
and tap Browse > All or any other  
category. Tap the tabs to filter the videos, and then  
tap a video to play it.  
2. Choose how you want to share the video link from  
the available options.  
Press  
and then tap  
tap a video to play it.  
, enter a search keyword in the text box  
. On the search results screen,  
3. Follow screen instructions to send the video link to  
your contacts.  
2. While watching a video:  
Capturing a Video and Sharing it on  
YouTube  
You need to be signed in to your Google Account to  
upload your video to YouTube.  
Turn your device sideways or double-tap the  
screen to watch the video in full-screen.  
In full screen, tap the screen to pause, resume  
playback, or drag the slider to jump to a different  
part of the video.  
1. On the YouTube screen, tap  
2. Tap to start recording video. When you are  
done capturing, tap  
.
Tap a tab to learn more about the video, see related  
videos, or check out what other viewers think.  
.
3. Tap Done, and then enter a title for your video.  
Tap  
Tap  
Tap  
to like or  
to unlike the video.  
4. Tap More details and then enter a description or  
tags for your video, set the privacy level, or send  
the location information along with the video.  
to see other options.  
to return to the YouTube main screen.  
to stop playback and return to the videos list.  
3. Press  
5. Tap Upload.  
245  
Closing YouTube  
NASCAR Sprint Cup Mobile  
While on the YouTube screen, press  
or  
.
NASCAR Sprint Cup MobileSM keeps all NASCAR related  
information in one convenient location on your device  
and enables you to personalize the content with your  
favorite driver. When you are away from the track, you  
can follow races using streaming MRN/PRN race  
broadcast coverage and in-car audio. NASCAR Sprint  
Cup Mobile delivers real-time, race-day statistics and  
telemetry from all 43 NASCAR Sprint Cup Series™  
drivers and offers video on demand from  
HTC Watch  
Use HTC Watch to preview trailers of current movies  
and to purchase movies.  
Press  
and tap  
> Watch. (You may need to  
scroll down the screen to see the icon.)  
NASCAR.COM, SPEED, and more.  
NASCAR Sprint Cup Mobile provides the following  
features:  
Personalize the program view to track your favorite  
driver  
Live MRN/PRN race broadcasts  
Live driver/team audio communications  
Real-time race-day statistics and telemetry for all 43  
NASCAR Sprint Cup Series drivers  
24-hour access to breaking NASCAR Sprint Cup  
Series news including insight and analysis from  
industry experts  
246  
     
Delivers race and qualifying results including  
NASCAR Sprint Cup Series points standings and  
season statistics  
2. On the welcome screen, tap the Car# or Driver  
name box. On the subsequent screen, enter your  
favorite NASCAR car number or driver name and  
then tap OK. Tap Go to continue.  
Offers video on demand from NASCAR.COM, SPEED  
programming and more  
– or –  
Note: While using this program, incoming calls may go  
Tap Select from a list and then tap a NASCAR  
driver.  
directly to voicemail.  
3. A message is then displayed, confirming whether  
to add your favorite NASCAR driver to your My  
Drivers list. Tap YES to add.  
Using NASCAR Sprint Cup Mobile for the  
First Time  
When you open NASCAR Sprint Cup Mobile for the  
first time, it will prompt you to specify your favorite  
NASCAR driver.  
4. If there are subsequent screens that are displayed,  
read the messages on the screens and select your  
preferences. Tap OK to proceed to the NASCAR  
Home screen.  
1. Press  
and tap  
> NASCAR. (You may need  
The NASCAR Sprint Cup Mobile Home  
Screen  
to scroll down the screen to see the icon.)  
Whenever you open NASCAR Sprint Cup Mobile, the  
NASCAR Home screen will be displayed, showing your  
favorite NASCAR driver banner with statistics.  
247  
Swipe your finger upward to scroll down the screen  
and browse through more content.  
To view information in another drawer, tap the  
drawer to open it.  
3. Ticker. Shows breaking news ticker.  
Note: The NASCAR Home screen below the driver banner  
looks different on race days and non-race days.  
1
2
The Menu Bar  
to display the Menu Bar and access more  
features of the NASCAR Sprint Cup Mobile.  
Press  
Menu Bar  
3
Navigating the Menu Bar  
1. Driver banner. Shows your favorite NASCAR driver  
with key statistics. Tap the banner to view the driver  
profile.  
1. Drag your finger left or right across the Menu Bar  
to scroll through the available feature.  
2. Drawer. Information on the NASCAR Home screen  
is organized into several drawers. When a drawer  
is open, it shows a down arrow at the right side of  
the drawer. Tap to close the drawer.   
248  
2. Tap an icon to select it and display the  
Icon  
Fantasy  
Description  
corresponding information.  
View NASCAR Fantasy league-  
related articles and videos.  
Icon  
Home  
Description  
Returns you to the NASCAR Home  
screen.  
Alerts &  
Personal-  
ization  
Allows you to:  
Change your primary favorite driver  
Add or delete any of the four  
secondary favorite drivers  
Subscribe and unsubscribe to free  
Sprint Cup SMS text alerts  
Set your default in-car audio  
My Driver Displays your favorite driver’s profile,  
season and race statistics, news  
and downloads.  
News  
Displays current driver and racing  
news as well editorial and recent  
race photos.  
Help  
Exit  
Displays the NASCAR Sprint Cup  
Mobile Help.  
Stats &  
Includes race results, point  
Schedules standings, and season statistics.  
The NASCAR season schedule is  
included here as well.  
When you want to close the  
program, select Exit, and then tap  
YES.  
NASCAR  
View live SPEED programming or  
on SPEED recorded video.  
Audio/  
Video  
Gives you access to the most recent  
NASCAR video and audio clips.  
Sprint Fan Learn about the latest Sprint  
Zone  
promotions, and see the recent  
winners in the Sprint All-Star  
Sweepstakes.  
249  
 
GPS Services  
3D. GPS Navigation  
Your device’s built-in GPS capability gives you access  
to a number of location-based services, including  
TeleNav Navigation, Google Maps, and Footprints.  
Activating Location Mode  
Before using any of the location-based services, you  
must turn on your device’s location mode.  
1. Press  
>
, tap Settings > Location, and then  
tap Location setting.  
2. Read the location disclaimer, select ON and   
press  
.
Turning on Location Services  
Before using Google Maps and Google Latitude, turn  
on your device’s location services.  
1. Press  
>
, tap Settings > Location.  
2. Select one or both of the following:  
Use wireless networks: Uses Wi-Fi or your mobile  
data connection to find your approximate location.  
250  
             
Use GPS satellites: Finds your exact GPS location.  
This requires a clear view of the sky and more  
battery power.  
Using TeleNav GPS Navigator  
1. Press  
and tap  
> TeleNav GPS Navigator.  
2. Select an option and follow the onscreen  
instructions to get directions, view maps, or access  
additional services and options.  
TeleNav GPS Navigator  
Drive To lets you enter an address (by either  
speaking it or by entering it on the keypad) or  
select from categories such as My Favorites,  
Recent Places, or Businesses to search for turn-  
by-turn directions.  
TeleNav GPS Navigator™ gives you turn-by-turn  
directions onscreen and over the speakerphone.  
Note: Depending on your service plan, TeleNav GPS  
Navigator may require a monthly subscription.   
Contact Sprint for information and pricing.  
Search provides a categorized list of locations  
such as Gas Stations, Grocery Stores, and  
Hospitals to help find local businesses and  
services.  
Registering TeleNav GPS Navigator  
Before you can use TeleNav GPS Navigator, your  
device and service must be registered.  
Maps & Traffic lets you view maps and get traffic  
information for your current location or for any  
other location (same categories as Drive To).  
1. Press  
and tap  
> TeleNav GPS Navigator.  
2. Follow the onscreen instructions to register your  
device.  
Share & More provides access to additional  
services such as Record Location, Product Tour,  
and Preferences.  
251  
   
Getting Around Maps  
Google Maps  
When you open Google Maps, you can easily find your  
location on the map or check out nearby places by  
panning and zooming in and out on the map.  
About Google Maps  
Google Maps lets you track your current location, view  
real-time traffic situations, and receive detailed  
directions to your destination. It also provides a search  
tool where you can locate places of interest or an  
address on a map, or view locations at street level.  
1. Press  
and tap  
> Maps.  
2. Tap  
marker  
to show your current location The blue  
shows your location on the map.  
3. Do any of the following:  
Notes: You need an active mobile data or Wi-Fi connection  
To  
Do this  
to use Google Maps.  
Swipe your finger to any direction on the  
screen to view nearby places on the map.  
Move around  
To find your location with Google Maps, you need to  
enable location sources. To learn how, see “Turning  
Zoom in  
Place your thumb and index fingers on  
top of the area that you want to zoom in,  
and then spread your fingers across the  
map.  
The Google Maps application does not cover every  
country or city.  
Tap  
.
Double-tap the area on the map that you  
want to zoom in.  
Zoom out  
Pinch your thumb and index finger on  
the map to zoom out.  
Tap  
252  
     
4. Do either of the following:  
To  
Do this  
Tap a marker ( ) to see if that is what you’re  
looking for, and then tap the balloon if it is.  
Press and hold a location on the map. A  
balloon opens over the location, with the  
address and a thumbnail from street  
view (if available).  
Tap the balloon to see more information.  
You can get directions to the location,  
check for nearby places of interest, and  
more.  
View  
information for  
a random  
location  
Tap  
to show the search results as a list, and  
then tap the location.  
Details about the selected location display on the  
screen.  
Searching For a Location  
In Google Maps, you can search for a location, such as  
an address or a type of business or establishment (for  
example, museums).  
1. Press  
and tap  
> Maps.  
2. Enter the place you want to search in the search  
box.  
3. Tap to search for the location you entered or tap a  
suggested search item. The search results are  
displayed as markers on the map.  
253  
 
5. Do either of the following:  
details. When you find the place you’re looking for,  
tap its balloon.  
Tap the onscreen buttons to view the location on  
a map, get directions, view the location in Street  
View, if available, and more. Scroll down the  
screen to view more options.  
3. On the location details screen, tap the Street View  
button  
.
Swipe left or right across the screen to view the  
information for the next or previous search result.  
4. To navigate in Street View, do any of the following:  
Clearing the Map  
After you’ve searched on a map, you can clear any  
markers you may have drawn on it.  
Press  
, and then tap Clear Map.  
Looking at a Location in Street View  
Street View mode (available only in selected areas)  
provides a street-level view of the location.  
1. Press  
and tap  
> Maps.  
2. Do one of the following:  
Press and hold a location on the map, and then  
tap the balloon that appears.  
Search for the place you want to view in Street  
Swipe your finger on the screen to pan up or  
down or to look in other directions.  
254  
To move to any part of the location or zoom in to  
an area, drag to the direction you want to go.  
Press and then tap Compass mode to turn  
Compass mode on. Tilt, pan, or turn your device  
to view the area around the location.  
3. Select any of the following:  
Traffic: (Available only in selected areas.) Real-  
time traffic conditions are displayed over roads as  
color-coded lines. Each color represents how fast  
the traffic is moving.  
Satellite: Google Maps uses the same satellite  
data as Google Earth™. Satellite images are not  
real-time. Google Earth acquires the best imagery  
available, most of which is approximately one to  
three years old.  
5. To return to the street map, press  
and then tap  
Go to map.  
Viewing Map Layers  
Initially, Google Maps opens with a street map. You can  
view additional map layers, such as satellite images,  
traffic information, your Google Latitude friends’  
locations, and more. You can view multiple layers at the  
same time.  
Terrain: Shows the elevation of the map you’re  
viewing. Elevation is limited to natural geographic  
features, like mountains and canyons and does  
not apply to buildings.  
Buzz: See photos and information about places  
Note: Not all locations have information to support all Map  
layers or all zoom levels. To learn more about layers,  
visit Google Maps on the Web: maps.google.com  
shared by other people, or post your own.  
Latitude: When you have joined Latitude, you can  
view your friends’ locations as a layer on the map.  
For information, see “Finding your friends with  
Google Latitude (available by country)” in this  
chapter.  
1. Press  
and tap  
> Maps.  
2. Tap  
.
Clear Map: Clear layers and view only the street  
map.  
255  
 
More Layers: Select more layers such as transit  
lines or maps that you have created in Google  
Maps on the Web.  
When several places are found, the search results  
display in a list. Tap a place to show its location  
on a map, and then tap its balloon to view more  
information about the place.  
Searching For a Place of Interest Near You  
do on the location information screen.  
Use Places to find places of interest near your current  
location. Places uses Google Maps to search common  
places that you would want to find, such as the nearest  
gas station or ATM kiosk.  
Adding a Place to Search  
In Places, you can add other places of interest that you  
frequently search for, such as a church or a pizza  
restaurant.  
Before you use Places, you need to enable location  
how.  
1. Press  
and tap  
> Places.  
1. Press  
and tap  
> Places.  
2. Tap Add.  
2. Tap the place you want to search.  
Enter the place you want to add to Places’ search  
items, and then tap Add. The place is added as a  
button on the Places’ screen.  
3. Do any of the following:  
When one or two places of interest are found, the  
search results are displayed as markers on the  
map. You can tap the marker, and then tap the  
balloon to view more information about the place.  
256  
 
5. Tap Go. The next screen displays the directions to  
your destination in a list.  
Getting Directions  
Get detailed directions to your destination. Google  
Maps can provide directions for travel by foot, public  
transportation, or car.  
6. If the place you’ve set as your destination has  
several locations available, choose which one to  
go to.  
1. Press  
and tap  
> Maps.  
2. While viewing a map, press  
Directions.  
, and then tap  
3. Use your current location as the starting point, or  
enter a location from where to start in the first text  
box. Then enter your destination in the second text  
box.  
– or –  
Tap  
to select an address from your contacts or  
a point that you tap on a map.  
7. Tap an item to view the directions on the map.  
4. Choose how you want to get to your destination by  
tapping the car, public transit, bicycle, or walk  
button.  
257  
 
8. Tap the arrow buttons on the map to follow the  
directions.  
Google Latitude  
When you’re finished viewing or following the  
Google Latitude™ user location service lets you and  
your friends share locations and status messages with  
each other. It also lets you send text and email  
messages, make phone calls, and get directions to  
your friends’ locations.  
directions, press  
and then tap Clear Map to reset the  
map. Your destination is automatically saved in the  
Google Maps history.  
Getting Help  
Get help and more information about Maps.  
Your location is not shared automatically. You must join  
Latitude, and then invite your friends to view your  
location or accept their invitations. Only friends that you  
have explicitly invited or accepted can see your  
location.  
To open the help, press  
, and then tap More > Help.  
The Web browser opens and takes you to the Google  
Maps Help site.  
Opening and Joining Latitude  
1. Press  
and tap  
> Maps.  
2. While viewing a map, press  
Join Latitude.  
and then tap   
258  
   
After you’ve joined Latitude and closed the Maps  
application, do one of the following to open it:  
Responding to an Invitation  
When you get a sharing request from a friend, you can:  
Press  
– or –  
Press  
and tap  
> Latitude.  
Accept and share back: You and your friend can  
see each other’s locations.  
and tap  
> Maps. Press  
and   
Accept, but hide my location: You can see your  
friend’s location, but they can’t see yours.  
tap Latitude.  
Don’t accept: No location information is shared  
between you and your friend.  
Inviting Friends to Share Their Locations  
1. Press  
and tap  
> Latitude.  
Viewing Your Friends’ Locations  
2. Press  
, and then tap Add friends.  
You can view your friends’ locations on a map or in a  
list.  
3. Choose how to add friends:  
Select from Contacts: Select any number of  
When you open Maps, your friends’ locations are  
shown. Each friend is represented by their picture (from  
People) with an arrow pointing to their approximate  
location. If a friend has chosen to share city-level  
locations, their picture does not have an arrow and  
appears in the middle of the city.  
friends from People entries.  
Add via email address: Enter one or more email  
addresses.  
4. When the Send sharing requests dialog box  
opens, tap Yes.  
If your friends already use Latitude, they receive an  
email request and a notification on Latitude. If they have  
not yet joined Latitude, they receive an email request  
that tells them to sign in to Latitude with their Google  
Account.  
To see a friend’s profile and connect, tap the photo.  
Your friend’s name appears in a balloon. Tap the  
balloon to open a screen with details about your friend  
and many connection options.  
259  
When you open Latitude you see a list of your Latitude  
friends, with a summary of their last known locations,  
status, and so on. Tap a friend in the list to open a  
screen with details about the friend and many  
connection options.  
Temporarily get faster location updates of  
the friend.  
Real-time  
updating  
Select from the following:  
Sharing  
options  
Share best available location. Share  
your precise location information.  
Share only city level location. Share  
only the city you’re in, not the street-  
level location. Your friend can see your  
photo icon in the middle of the city  
you’re in. To share more precise  
location again, tap Best available  
location.  
Hide from this friend. Stop sharing  
your location with this friend, in a list or  
on a map.  
Connecting With and Managing Friends  
Tap a friend’s contact details balloon in map view or  
tap a friend in list view to open your friend’s profile. Tap  
any of the following buttons or options on the profile  
screen:  
Shows your friend’s location on the  
map.  
Remove the friend from your list and  
stop sharing locations with him or her  
altogether.  
Remove this  
friend  
Get directions to your friend’s location.  
View your friend’s location in Street  
View.  
Your friend’s  
photo  
Opens Quick contact and lets you view  
your friend’s contact details, send your  
friend an email message, and more.  
Send your friend a notification to “check  
in” to a meeting place, and when your  
friend checks in, you’ll get a notification  
so you know your friend has arrived.  
Ping for check  
in  
260  
Changing Privacy Settings  
Footprints  
You have control over how and when you can be found  
by your friends. Only the last location sent to Latitude is  
stored with your Google Account. If you turn off Latitude  
or are hiding, no location is stored.  
Footprints™ provides an easy way to record favorite  
places and revisit those places. A footprint consists of a  
photo you take of a location such as a restaurant or  
sightseeing destination stored together with a precise  
GPS position and other information about that location  
such as the street address and phone number.  
1. Press  
and tap  
> Latitude.  
2. Tap your own name, and then tap Edit privacy  
settings.  
The next time you want to visit the same place, simply  
access the footprint. You can then dial the phone  
number or view the location in Google Maps.  
3. Set the following options to your preferences:  
Detect your location: Let Latitude detect and  
update your location as you move. The update  
frequency is determined by several factors, such  
as how recently your location has changed.  
Notes: Use GPS satellites must be selected in Settings >  
Location so that your device can determine your GPS  
location. You will be asked to turn GPS on if the option  
is turned off.  
Set your location: Choose from several options to  
manually select your location.  
Make sure that the Geo-tag photos option in the  
camera application is selected. For more information,  
Do not detect your location: Hide your location  
from all your friends.  
Sign out of Latitude: Disable Latitude and stop  
sharing your location or status. You can always  
join Latitude again.  
261  
     
Creating a Footprint  
Revisiting a Footprint  
1. Press  
and tap  
> Camera.  
1. Press  
and tap  
> Footprints.  
2. Tap  
to capture the photo.  
2. Tap a Footprint category.  
3. Tap Set as > Footprints.  
3. Tap the Footprint you want to revisit.  
4. Crop the photo and tap Save. See “Editing Your  
Photos” on page 142 to learn how to crop photos.  
5. Do the following:  
Tap to show the  
address in  
Google Maps.  
Enter a name for the Footprint.  
Tap Select categories to put the Footprint into a  
category to make it easier for you to find it.  
Tap  
to change the name, category, or address  
of the Footprint, enter the phone and website, and  
add a voice memo to the Footprint.  
Tap to open the URL  
in the browser.  
Tap  
to recapture the Footprint photo.  
6. Tap Done.  
262  
Editing or Deleting a Footprint  
Importing Footprints  
On a category screen, press and hold the Footprint you  
want to edit or delete, and then tap Edit or Delete on  
the options menu.  
You can restore footprints you previously backed up to  
the storage card. You can also import .kmz files that  
you saved in other applications, or use a photo as a  
footprint.  
Exporting your Footprints  
1. Press  
and tap  
> Footprints.  
You can back up footprints by exporting them to a  
storage card. You can also open exported footprint files  
in other applications such as Google Earth on your  
computer.  
2. Press  
and tap Import.  
3. Do one of the following:  
To import a photo, tap Photos, navigate to the  
photo you want to import, and then tap the photo.  
Crop the photo and then tap Save. You can then  
add Footprints information such as location and  
category.  
Press  
of the following:  
To export all your footprints, tap All footprints,  
press and tap Export.  
To export all footprints from a particular category,  
tap a category, press and tap Export.  
and tap  
> Footprints, and then do any  
To import saved footprints or another .kmz file  
from the microSD card, tap Footprints data, and  
then tap the file you want to import. If a footprint  
on the device is the same as one you want to  
import, you are asked whether you want to  
overwrite it.  
Exported footprints are saved as .kmz files in the  
Footprints_Data folder on your microSD card. If you  
exported multiple footprints at one time, they are saved  
together in one .kmz file.  
263  
Adding the Footprints Widget  
Add the Footprints widget to view and access your  
footprints on the Home screen.  
To learn how to add the Footprint widget, see  
264  
Section 4  
Safety and Warranty  
Information  
   
This User Guide contains important operational and  
safety information that will help you safely use your  
device. Failure to read and follow the information  
provided in this guide may result in serious bodily  
injury, death, or property damage.  
4A. Important Safety  
Information  
Important Health Information and  
Safety Precautions  
When using this product, the safety precautions below  
must be taken to avoid possible legal liabilities and  
damages.  
Retain and follow all product safety and operating  
instructions. Observe all warnings in the operating  
instructions on the product.  
To reduce the risk of bodily injury, electric shock, fire,  
and damage to the equipment, observe the following  
precautions.  
266  
     
Electrical Safety  
Safety Precautions for Power Supply Unit  
Use the correct external power source  
This product is intended for use when supplied with  
power from the designated battery or power supply  
unit. Other usage may be dangerous and will invalidate  
any approval given to this product.  
A product should be operated only from the type  
of power source indicated on the electrical  
ratings label. If you are not sure of the type of  
power source required, consult your authorized  
service provider or local power company. For a  
product that operates from battery power or  
other sources, refer to the operating instructions  
that are included with the product.  
Safety Precautions for Proper Grounding  
Installation  
CAUTION: Connecting to an improperly grounded  
equipment can result in an electric shock to your  
device.  
This product should be operated only with the  
following designated power supply unit(s).   
AC Adapter HTC, Model TC U250  
This product is equipped with a USB cable for  
connecting with desktop or notebook computer. Be  
sure your computer is properly grounded (earthed)  
before connecting this product to the computer. The  
power supply cord of a desktop or notebook computer  
has an equipment-grounding conductor and a  
grounding plug. The plug must be plugged into an  
appropriate outlet which is properly installed and  
grounded in accordance with all local codes and  
ordinances.  
Handle battery packs carefully  
This product contains a Lithium-ion polymer or  
Lithium-ion battery. There is a risk of fire and  
burns if the battery pack is handled improperly.  
Do not attempt to open or service the battery  
pack. Do not disassemble, crush, puncture,  
short external contacts or circuits, dispose of in  
fire or water, or expose a battery pack to  
temperatures higher than 140°F (60°C).  
267  
Take Extra Precautions  
Keep the battery or device dry and away from water  
or any liquid as it may cause a short circuit.  
WARNING: Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly  
replaced. To reduce risk of fire or burns, do not  
disassemble, crush, puncture, short external  
contacts, expose to temperatures above 140°F  
(60°C), or dispose of in fire or water. Replace only  
with specified batteries. Recycle or dispose of  
used batteries according to the local regulations  
or reference guide supplied with your product.  
Keep metal objects away so they don’t come in  
contact with the battery or its connectors as it may  
lead to short circuit during operation.  
The device should only be connected to products  
that bear the USB-IF logo or have completed the  
USB-IF compliance program.  
Do not use a battery that appears damaged,  
deformed, or discolored, or the one that has any rust  
on its casing, overheats, or emits a foul odor.  
Note: This product should be operated only with the following  
designated Battery Pack(s).  
Always keep the battery out of the reach of babies  
and small children, to avoid swallowing of the battery.  
Consult the doctor immediately if the battery is  
swallowed.  
HTC, Model BG86100.  
Only use the battery with a charging system that has  
been qualified with the system per this standard,  
IEEE-Std-1725-2006. Use of an unqualified battery or  
charger may present a risk of fire, explosion, leakage  
or other hazard.  
268  
Replace the battery only with another battery that has  
been qualified with the system per this standard,  
IEEE-Std-1725-2006. Use of an unqualified battery  
may present a risk of fire, explosion, leakage or other  
hazard.  
Safety Precautions for Direct Sunlight  
Keep this product away from excessive moisture and  
extreme temperatures. Do not leave the product or its  
battery inside a vehicle or in places where the  
temperature may exceed 60°C (140°F), such as on a  
car dashboard, window sill, or behind a glass that is  
exposed to direct sunlight or strong ultraviolet light for  
extended periods of time. This may damage the  
product, overheat the battery, or pose a risk to the  
vehicle.  
Avoid dropping the device or battery. If the device or  
battery is dropped, especially on a hard surface, and  
the user suspects damage, take it to a service center  
for inspection.  
If the battery leaks:  
Do not allow the leaking fluid to come in contact  
with skin or clothing. If already in contact, flush the Prevention of Hearing Loss  
affected area immediately with clean water and  
seek medical advice.  
CAUTION: Permanent hearing loss may occur if  
earphones or headphones are used at high volume for  
prolonged periods of time.  
Do not allow the leaking fluid to come in contact  
with eyes. If already in contact, DO NOT rub; rinse  
with clean water immediately and seek medical  
advice.  
Safety in Aircraft  
Due to the possible interference caused by this product  
to an aircraft’s navigation system and its  
communications network, using this device’s phone  
function on board an airplane is against the law in  
most countries. If you want to use this device when on  
board an aircraft, remember to turn off your phone by  
switching to airplane mode.  
Take extra precautions to keep a leaking battery  
away from fire as there is a danger of ignition or  
explosion.  
269  
Areas with a potentially explosive atmosphere are often,  
but not always, clearly marked. These include fueling  
areas, below deck on boats, fuel or chemical transfer or  
storage facilities, and areas where the air contains  
chemicals or particles, such as grain, dust, or metal  
powders.  
Environmental Restrictions  
Do not use this product in gas stations, fuel depots,  
chemical plants or where blasting operations are in  
progress, or in potentially explosive atmospheres such  
as fuelling areas, fuel storehouses, below deck on  
boats, chemical plants, fuel or chemical transfer or  
storage facilities, and areas where the air contains  
chemicals or particles, such as grain, dust, or metal  
powders. Please be aware that sparks in such areas  
could cause an explosion or fire resulting in bodily  
injury or even death.  
Road Safety  
Full attention must be given to driving at all times in  
order to reduce the risk of an accident. Using a phone  
while driving (even with a hands-free device) causes  
distraction and can lead to an accident. You must  
comply with local laws and regulations restricting the  
use of wireless devices while driving.  
Explosive Atmospheres  
When in any area with a potentially explosive  
atmosphere or where flammable materials exist, the  
product should be turned off and the user should obey  
all signs and instructions. Sparks in such areas could  
cause an explosion or fire resulting in bodily injury or  
even death. Users are advised not to use the  
equipment at refueling points such as service or gas  
stations, and are reminded of the need to observe  
restrictions on the use of radio equipment in fuel  
depots, chemical plants, or where blasting operations  
are in progress.  
Safety Precautions for RF Exposure  
Avoid using your phone near metal structures (for  
example, the steel frame of a building).  
Avoid using your phone near strong electromagnetic  
sources, such as microwave ovens, sound speakers,  
TV and radio.  
Use only original manufacturer-approved  
accessories, or accessories that do not contain any  
metal.  
270  
Use of non-original manufacturer-approved  
accessories may violate your local RF exposure  
guidelines and should be avoided.  
Hearing Aids  
Some digital wireless phones may interfere with some  
hearing aids. In the event of such interference, you may  
want to consult your service provider, or call the  
customer service line to discuss alternatives.  
Interference with Medical Equipment  
Functions  
Nonionizing Radiation  
Your device has an internal antenna. This product  
should be operated in its normal-use position to ensure  
the radiative performance and safety of the  
interference. As with other mobile radio transmitting  
equipment, users are advised that for satisfactory  
operation of the equipment and for the safety of  
personnel, it is recommended that no part of the  
human body be allowed to come too close to the  
antenna during operation of the equipment.  
This product may cause medical equipment to  
malfunction. The use of this device is forbidden in most  
hospitals and medical clinics.  
If you use any other personal medical device, consult  
the manufacturer of your device to determine if they are  
adequately shielded from external RF energy. Your  
physician may be able to assist you in obtaining this  
information.  
Turn your phone OFF in health care facilities when any  
regulations posted in these areas instruct you to do so.  
Hospitals or health care facilities may be using  
equipment that could be sensitive to external RF  
energy.  
Use only the supplied integral antenna. Use of  
unauthorized or modified antennas may impair call  
quality and damage the phone, causing loss of  
performance and SAR levels exceeding the  
recommended limits as well as result in non-  
compliance with local regulatory requirements in your  
country.  
271  
To assure optimal phone performance and ensure  
human exposure to RF energy is within the guidelines  
set forth in the relevant standards, always use your  
device only in its normal-use position. Contact with the  
antenna area may impair call quality and cause your  
device to operate at a higher power level than needed.  
Faulty and damaged products  
Do not attempt to disassemble the device or its  
accessories.  
Only qualified personnel should service or repair  
the device or its accessories.  
Avoiding contact with the antenna area when the  
phone is IN USE optimizes the antenna performance  
and the battery life.  
General Precautions  
You alone are responsible for how you use your device  
and any consequences of its use. You must always  
switch off your phone wherever the use of a phone is  
prohibited. Use of your phone is subject to safety  
measures designed to protect users and their  
environment.  
Electrical Safety  
Accessories  
Use only approved accessories.  
Do not connect with incompatible products or  
accessories.  
Avoid applying excessive pressure to the device.  
Do not apply excessive pressure on the screen  
and the device to prevent damaging them and  
remove the device from your pants’ pocket  
before sitting down. It is also recommended that  
you store the device in a protective case and  
only use the device stylus or your finger when  
interacting with the touchscreen. Cracked  
display screens due to improper handling are  
not covered by the warranty.  
Take care not to touch or allow metal objects,  
such as coins or key rings, to contact or short-  
circuit the battery terminals.  
Connection to a car  
Seek professional advice when connecting a  
phone interface to the vehicle electrical system.  
272  
 
Device getting warm after prolonged use.  
Do not drop, throw or try to bend your device or  
its accessories.  
When using your device for prolonged periods  
of time, such as when you’re talking on the  
phone, charging the battery or browsing the  
Web, the device may become warm. In most  
cases, this condition is normal and therefore  
should not be interpreted as a problem with the  
device.  
Do not use harsh chemicals, cleaning solvents, or  
aerosols to clean the device or its accessories.  
Do not paint your device or its accessories.  
Do not attempt to disassemble your device or its  
accessories. Only authorized personnel may do  
so.  
Heed service markings.  
Do not expose your device or its accessories to  
extreme temperatures, minimum -4°F (-20°C) and  
maximum 122°F (50°C).  
Except as explained elsewhere in the Operating  
or Service documentation, do not service any  
product yourself. Service needed on  
components inside the device should be done  
by an authorized service technician or provider.  
Please check local regulations for disposal of  
electronic products.  
Do not carry your device in your back pocket as it  
could break when you sit down.  
Protect your device.  
Always treat your device and its accessories with  
care and keep them in a clean and dust-free  
place.  
Send the product for service.  
Unplug the product from the electrical outlet and  
refer servicing to an authorized service  
technician or provider under the following  
conditions:  
Do not expose your device or its accessories to  
open flames or lit tobacco products.  
Do not expose your device or its accessories to  
liquid, moisture or high humidity.  
Liquid has been spilled or an object has fallen  
into the product.  
273  
The product has been exposed to rain or water.  
The product has been dropped or damaged.  
There are noticeable signs of overheating.  
NOTICE: When taking the device from low-  
temperature conditions into a warmer  
environment or from high-temperature  
conditions into a cooler environment, allow the  
device to acclimate to room temperature before  
turning on power.  
The product does not operate normally when you  
follow the operating instructions.  
Avoid operating the product in hot areas.  
Avoid pushing objects into product.  
The product should be placed away from heat  
sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves,  
or other products (including amplifiers) that  
produce heat.  
Never push objects of any kind into cabinet slots  
or other openings in the product. Slots and  
openings are provided for ventilation. These  
openings must not be blocked or covered.  
Avoid operating the product in wet areas.  
Avoid placing device near air bags.  
Never use the product in a wet location.  
Do not place your device in the area over an air  
bag or in the air bag deployment area. Store the  
device safely before driving your vehicle.  
Avoid using your device after a dramatic change in  
temperature.  
Use only manufacturer-approved mounting  
When you move your device between  
accessories.  
environments with very different temperature  
and/or humidity ranges, condensation may form  
on or within the device. To avoid damaging the  
device, allow sufficient time for the moisture to  
evaporate before using the device.  
Do not use the product on an unstable table,  
cart, stand, tripod, or bracket. Any mounting of  
the product should follow the manufacturer’s  
instructions, and should use a mounting  
accessory recommended by the manufacturer.  
274  
Avoid unstable mounting.  
Do not place the product with an unstable base.  
Avoid repetitive motion injuries.  
To minimize the risk of RSI, when texting or  
playing games with your device:  
Use only manufacturer-approved equipment.  
Do not grip the device too tightly.  
This product should be used only with personal  
computers and options identified as suitable for  
use with your equipment.  
Press the buttons lightly.  
Make use of the special features in the  
handset which minimize the number of  
buttons which have to be pressed, such as  
message templates and predictive text.  
Adjust the volume before using headphones.  
Turn down the volume before using  
headphones or other audio devices.  
Take lots of breaks to stretch and relax.  
Clean the product.  
Be attentive when operating machinery.  
Unplug the product from the wall outlet before  
cleaning. Do not use liquid cleaners or aerosol  
cleaners. Use a damp cloth for cleaning, but  
NEVER use water to clean the LCD screen.  
Full attention must be given to operating the  
machinery in order to reduce the risk of an  
accident.  
Product produces loud noise.  
Keep the product out of reach of small children.  
This device is capable of producing loud noises  
which may damage your hearing.  
Using the product during emergencies.  
Do not leave your device and its accessories  
within the reach of small children or allow them  
to play with it. They could hurt themselves or  
others, or could accidentally damage the device.  
Your device contains small parts with sharp  
edges that may cause an injury or which could  
become detached and create a choking hazard.  
Your device, like any wireless phone, operates  
using radio signals, which cannot guarantee  
connection in all conditions. Therefore, you must  
never rely solely on any wireless phone for  
emergency communications.  
275  
Using the 3D Function of Your Device  
Additional Safety Information  
WARNING  
Do Not Use the PC Functions of Your Device  
While Driving or Walking  
If you experience eye strain, headaches, dizziness,  
nausea, or other symptoms, immediately stop using  
the 3D function until symptoms end.  
Never use the personal computer functions of your  
device while driving an automobile or any other  
moving vehicle. Always pull out of traffic and come to a  
stop in a legally permissible and safe location before  
using your device. Failure to do so could result in  
serious bodily injury in a traffic accident.  
Take periodic breaks in viewing to prevent these  
symptoms or any impairment of vision.  
To prevent injury, do not operate a motor vehicle or  
engage in other hazardous activities if you are  
experiencing any dizziness or visual impairment.  
When driving:  
To avoid damage to developing eyes, do not allow  
children under 7 to use 3D function.  
Never place your device on the passenger seat or  
anyplace else in the car where it can become a  
projectile during a collision or stop.  
Discuss specific concerns with your optometrist,  
ophthalmologist, or physician.  
An air bag inflates with great force. DO NOT place  
objects, including either installed or portable wireless  
equipment, in the area over the air bag or in the air  
bag deployment area. If in-vehicle wireless  
equipment is improperly installed and the air bag  
inflates, serious injury could result.  
276  
 
Never store or transport flammable liquids, gases or  
explosive materials in the same compartment of your  
automobile as the device or any of its accessories, as  
possible sparking in the device could cause ignition or  
explosion.  
Pull off the road and park before making or  
answering a call.  
WARNING: Failure to follow these instructions could lead to  
serious personal injury and possible property  
damage.  
Never use your device while walking. Usage while  
walking could result in bodily injury caused by  
inattention to automobile traffic or other pedestrian  
hazards.  
When Using Your Device Near Other  
Electronic Devices  
Using The Phone While Driving Is Extremely  
Dangerous  
Your wireless handheld portable device is a low power  
radio transmitter and receiver. When it is ON, it receives  
and also sends out radio frequency (RF) signals.  
Talking on or using your device while driving is  
extremely dangerous and is illegal in some states.  
Remember, safety comes first. Check the laws and  
regulations on the use of phones in the areas where  
you drive. Always obey them.  
Most modern electronic equipment is shielded from RF  
energy. However, certain electronic equipment may not  
be shielded against the RF signals from your wireless  
device; therefore, use of your device must be restricted  
in certain situations.  
If you must use the phone function while driving,  
please:  
In addition, the computer portion of your device  
produces low levels of RF energy due to the generation  
of digital timing pulses by its clock oscillator circuits.  
Your device has been equipped with internal shielding  
to minimize stray emissions of RF energy.  
Give full attention to driving. Driving safely is your first  
responsibility.  
Use hands-free operation or one-touch, speed  
dialing, and auto-answer modes.  
277  
However, use of the computer functions of your device  
must be restricted in certain situations.  
Turn Off Your Device Before Flying  
Aircraft  
Hearing Aids  
FCC regulations prohibit using the transmitting and  
phone functions of your device while in the air. In  
addition, most airline regulations prohibit the on-board  
use of portable PCs (and all other portable electronic  
devices that could potentially emit stray RF energy),  
particularly during take-offs and landings, to prevent  
any possible interference with the reception of signals  
by airborne electronic navigational devices.  
Some digital wireless phones may interfere with some  
hearing aids. In the event of such interference, you may  
want to consult your service provider, or call the  
customer service line to discuss alternatives.  
Electronic Devices in Vehicles  
RF signals may affect improperly installed or  
inadequately shielded electronic systems in motor  
vehicles. Check with the manufacturer or its  
representative regarding your vehicle. You should also  
consult the manufacturer of any equipment that has  
been added to your vehicle.  
Turn your device OFF before boarding an aircraft.  
Always request and obtain prior consent and approval  
of an authorized airline representative before using  
your device aboard an aircraft. Always follow the  
instructions of the airline representative whenever using  
your device aboard an aircraft, to prevent any possible  
interference with airborne electronic equipment.  
Posted Facilities  
Turn your device OFF where posted notices so require.  
278  
Turn Off Your Device in Dangerous Areas  
General Safety and Other Precautions  
Your device is a high quality piece of equipment.  
Before operating, read all instructions and cautionary  
markings on the product, battery, and AC charger.  
Blasting Areas  
To avoid interfering with blasting operations, turn your  
device OFF when in a “blasting area” or in areas  
posted “Turn off two-way radio.” Obey all signs and  
instructions.  
Failure to follow the directions below could result in  
serious bodily injury or property damage due to battery  
liquid leakage, fire or rupture.  
Potentially Explosive Atmospheres  
DO NOT use or store this equipment in a place where it  
will be exposed to high temperatures, such as near an  
open flame or heat-emitting equipment.  
Turn your device OFF when in any area with a  
potentially explosive atmosphere and obey all signs  
and instructions. Sparks in such areas could cause an  
explosion or fire resulting in bodily injury or even death.  
DO NOT drop your device or subject it to severe shock.  
When not using, lay down the unit to avoid possible  
damage due to instability.  
Areas with a potentially explosive atmosphere are often,  
but not always, clearly marked. They include fueling  
areas such as gas stations; below deck on boats; fuel  
or chemical transfer or storage facilities; vehicles using  
liquefied petroleum gas (such as propane or butane);  
areas where the air contains chemicals or articles, such  
as grain, dust, or metal powders; and any other area  
where you would normally be advised to turn off your  
vehicle’s engine.  
DO NOT expose this equipment to rain or spilled  
beverages.  
DO NOT use unauthorized accessories.  
DO NOT disassemble the device or its accessories. If  
service or repair is required, return unit to an authorized  
Sprint service center. If the unit is disassembled, the  
risk of electric shock or fire may result.  
279  
Never allow metallic objects, such as staples and  
paper clips, to get into the inside of your device.  
Battery Safety  
Your device uses a removable and rechargeable  
lithium ion battery. Please contact customer service for  
assistance should you need a replacement battery.  
Never touch the liquid that might leak from a broken  
liquid crystal display. Contact with this liquid could  
cause a skin rash. If the crystal display liquid should  
come into contact with the skin or clothing, wash it  
immediately with clean water.  
DOs  
Only use the battery and charger approved by the  
In the event that the device emits an unusual odor or  
sound or generates smoke, immediately disconnect  
the AC charger from the power outlet, and then detach  
the battery.  
manufacturer.  
Only use the battery for its original purpose.  
Try to keep batteries at a temperature between 41°F  
(5°C) and 95°F (35°C).  
If the battery is stored in temperatures above or  
below the recommended range, give it time to warm  
up or cool down before using.  
Antenna Safety  
Use only the supplied or an approved replacement  
antenna. Unauthorized antennas, modifications, or  
attachments could impair call quality, damage your  
device, or result in violation of FCC regulations. Please  
contact your local dealer for replacement antenna.  
Completely drain the battery before recharging. It  
may take one to four days to completely drain.  
Store the discharged battery in a cool, dark, and dry  
place.  
Do not use the device with a damaged antenna. If a  
damaged antenna comes into contact with the skin, a  
minor burn may result. Please contact your local dealer  
for replacement antenna.  
Purchase a new battery when its operating time  
gradually decreases after fully charging.  
Properly dispose of the battery according to local  
regulations.  
280  
 
DON’Ts  
medical attention. In the event the liquid comes into  
contact with the skin or clothing, wash it away  
immediately with clean water.  
Don’t attempt to disassemble the battery – it is a  
sealed unit with no serviceable parts.  
Don’t expose the battery terminals to any other metal  
object (e.g., by carrying it in your pocket or purse  
with other metallic objects such as coins, clips and  
pens). This can short circuit and critically damage  
the battery.  
AC Charger  
Use the Correct External Power Source  
A product should be operated only from the type of  
power source indicated on the electrical ratings label. If  
you are not sure of the type of power source required,  
consult your authorized service provider or local power  
company. For a product that operates from battery  
power or other sources, refer to the operating  
Don’t leave the battery in hot or cold temps.  
Otherwise, it could significantly reduce the capacity  
and lifetime of the battery.  
Don’t dispose of the battery by burning.  
instructions that are included with the product.  
Lithium ion batteries are recyclable. When you replace  
the removable battery, please request the repair center  
to recycle the battery in accordance with RBRC  
standards. When disposing of the battery by yourself,  
please call RBRC at (800) 822-8837 for proper  
disposal tips.  
The AC charger designed by Sprint for this unit  
requires the use of a standard 120 V AC power source  
for device operation.  
Never attempt to disassemble or repair an AC charger.  
Never use an AC charger if it has a damaged or worn  
power cord or plug. Always contact a Sprint authorized  
service center, if repair or replacement is required.  
Never touch any fluid that might leak from the built-in  
battery. Such liquid when in contact with the eyes or  
skin, could cause injury to the skin or eyes. Should the  
liquid come into contact with the eyes, irrigate the eyes  
thoroughly with clean water and immediately seek  
Never alter the AC cord or plug on an AC charger. If the  
plug will not fit into the available outlet, have a proper  
outlet installed by a qualified electrician.  
281  
Never allow any liquids or water to spill on an AC  
charger when it is connected to an AC power source.  
Regulatory Agency Identifications  
Always use the authorized Sprint AC charger to avoid  
any risk of bodily injury or damage to your wireless  
device or battery.  
For regulatory identification purposes, your product is  
assigned a model number of PG86100.  
To ensure continued reliable and safe operation of your  
device, use only the accessories listed below with your  
PG86100.  
Never attempt to connect or disconnect the AC charger  
with wet hands. Always unplug the AC charger from the  
power source before attempting any cleaning. Always  
use a soft cloth dampened with water to clean the  
equipment, after it has been unplugged.  
The Battery Pack has been assigned a model number  
of BG86100. Operating temperature range: 32°F to  
104°F (0°C to 40°C)  
Handling the cord on this product or cords associated  
with accessories sold with this product, will expose you  
to lead, a chemical known to the State of California to  
cause birth defects or other reproductive harm. Wash  
hands after handling.  
Note: This product is intended for use with a certified Class 2  
Limited Power Source, rated 5 Volts DC, maximum 1  
Amp power supply unit.  
Always disconnect the travel charger or desktop  
charger from the power source when it is not in use.  
282  
 
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit  
different from that to which the receiver is connected.  
Federal Communication  
Commission Interference  
Statement  
Consult the dealer or an experienced radio or  
television technician for help.  
FCC Caution: Any changes or modifications not  
expressly approved by the party responsible for  
compliance could void the user’s authority to operate  
this equipment.  
This equipment has been tested and found to comply  
with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to  
Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to  
provide reasonable protection against harmful  
interference in a residential installation. This equipment  
generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency  
energy and, if not installed and used in accordance  
with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to  
radio communications. However, there is no guarantee  
that interference will not occur in a particular  
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.  
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1)  
This device may not cause harmful interference, and  
(2) this device must accept any interference received,  
including interference that may cause undesired  
operation.  
installation. If this equipment does cause harmful  
interference to radio or television reception, which can  
be determined by turning the equipment off and on,  
the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference  
by one of the following measures:  
Important Note  
Radiation Exposure Statement:  
This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure  
limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. End  
users must follow the specific operating instructions for  
satisfying RF exposure compliance. To maintain  
compliance with FCC RF exposure compliance  
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.  
Increase the separation between the equipment and  
receiver.  
283  
 
requirements, please follow operation instruction as  
documented in this manual.  
may be compatible with their hearing devices. Not all  
phones have been rated. Phones that are rated have  
the rating on their box or a label located on the box.  
The ratings are not guarantees. Results will vary  
depending on the user’s hearing device and hearing  
loss. If your hearing device happens to be vulnerable to  
interference, you may not be able to use a rated phone  
successfully. Trying out the phone with your hearing  
device is the best way to evaluate it for your personal  
needs.  
This transmitter must not be co-located or operating in  
conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter,  
except the transmitters built-in with the device.  
FCC Hearing-Aid Compatibility (HAC)  
Regulations for Wireless Devices  
On July 10, 2003, the U.S. Federal Communications  
Commission (FCC) Report and Order in WT Docket 01-  
309 modified the exception of wireless phones under  
the Hearing Aid Compatibility Act of 1988 (HAC Act) to  
require digital wireless phones be compatible with  
hearing-aids. The intent of the HAC Act is to ensure  
reasonable access to telecommunications services for  
persons with hearing disabilities. While some wireless  
phones are used near some hearing devices (hearing  
aids and cochlear implants), users may detect a  
buzzing, humming, or whining noise. Some hearing  
devices are more immune than others to this  
M-Ratings: Phones rated M3 or M4 meet FCC  
requirements and are likely to generate less interference  
to hearing devices than phones that are not rated. M4 is  
the better/higher of the two ratings. Your PG86100 is  
rated M4.  
T-Ratings: Phones rated T3 or T4 meet FCC  
requirements and are likely to be more usable with a  
hearing aid’s telecoil than phones that are not rated. T4  
is the better/higher of the two ratings. Your PG86100 is  
rated T3.  
interference noise, and phones also vary in the amount  
of interference they generate. The wireless telephone  
industry has developed a rating system for wireless  
phones, to assist hearing device users find phones that  
284  
Please power off the Bluetooth function while using  
hearing aid devices with your PG86100.  
This methodology applies equally for T ratings. The M  
mark is intended to be synonymous with the U mark.  
The T mark is intended to be synonymous with the UT  
mark. The M and T marks are recommended by the  
Alliance for Telecommunications Industries Solutions  
(ATIS). The U and UT marks are referenced in Section  
20.19 of the FCC Rules. The HAC rating and  
measurement procedure are described in the  
American National Standards Institute (ANSI) C63.19  
standard.  
Hearing devices may  
also be rated. Your  
hearing device  
manufacturer or  
hearing health  
professional may help  
you find this rating.  
Higher ratings mean  
that the hearing device  
is relatively immune to  
interference noise.  
This phone has been tested and rated for use with  
hearing aids for some of the wireless technologies that  
it uses. However, there may be some newer wireless  
technologies used in this phone that have not been  
tested yet for use with hearing aids. It is important to try  
the different features of this phone thoroughly and in  
different locations, using your hearing aid or cochlear  
implant, to determine if you hear any interfering noise.  
Consult your service provider or the manufacturer of  
this phone for information on hearing aid compatibility.  
If you have questions about return or exchange  
The hearing aid and wireless phone rating values are  
then added together. A sum of 5 is considered  
acceptable for normal use. A sum of 6 is considered  
for better use. A sum of 8 is considered for best use. In  
the above example, if a hearing aid meets the M2 level  
rating and the wireless phone meets the M3 level  
rating, the sum of the two values equal M5. This should  
provide the hearing aid user with “normal usage” while  
using their hearing aid with the particular wireless  
phone. “Normal usage” in this context is defined as a  
signal quality that is acceptable for normal operation.  
policies, consult your service provider or phone retailer.  
285  
SAR Information  
For information about hearing aids and digital  
0.885 W/kg @ 1g (HEAD)  
1.11 W/kg @ 1g (BODY)  
wireless phones  
FCC Hearing Aid Compatibility and Volume  
Control:  
THIS MODEL DEVICE MEETS THE GOVERNMENT’S  
REQUIREMENTS FOR EXPOSURE TO RADIO WAVES.  
For body worn operation, this device has been tested  
and meets the FCC RF exposure guidelines when  
used with the HTC Corporation. Accessories supplied  
or designated for this product. Use of other accessories  
may not ensure compliance with the FCC RF exposure  
guidelines.  
Gallaudet University, RERC:  
Your wireless mobile phone is a radio transmitter and  
receiver. It is designed and manufactured not to exceed  
the emission limits for exposure to radio frequency (RF)  
energy set by the Federal Communications  
Commission of the U.S. Government. These limits are  
part of comprehensive guidelines and establish  
permitted levels of RF energy for the general  
population. The guidelines are based on the safety  
standards previously set by both U.S. and international  
standards bodies:  
American National Standards Institute (ANSI) IEEE.  
C95.1-1992.  
286  
 
National Council on Radiation Protection and  
Measurement (NCRP). Report 86. 1986.  
International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation  
Protection (ICNIRP) 1996.  
Ministry of Health (Canada), Safety Code 6. The  
standards include a substantial safety margin  
designed to assure the safety of all persons,  
regardless of age and health.  
The exposure standard for wireless mobile phone  
employs a unit of measurement known as the Specific  
Absorption Rate, or SAR. The SAR limit set by the FCC  
is 1.6 W/kg.  
In the U.S. and Canada, the SAR limit for mobile  
phones used by the public is 1.6 Watts/kg (W/kg)  
averaged over one gram of tissue. The standard  
incorporates a substantial margin of safety to give  
additional protection for the public and to account for  
any variations in usage. Normal condition only to  
ensure the radiative performance and safety of the  
interference. As with other mobile radio transmitting  
equipment, users are advised that for satisfactory  
operation of the equipment and for the safety of  
personnel, it is recommended that no part of the  
human body be allowed to come too close to the  
antenna during operation of the equipment.  
The FCC has granted an Equipment Authorization for  
this model device with all reported SAR levels  
evaluated as in compliance with the FCC RF exposure  
guidelines. SAR information on this model device is on  
file with the FCC and can be found under the Display  
Grant section of   
searching on FCC ID: NM8PG86100.   
Additional information on Specific Absorption Rates  
(SAR) can be found on the Cellular  
Body-worn Operation  
This device was tested for typical body-worn  
operations. To comply with RF exposure requirements,  
a minimum separation distance of 0.4 inch (1 cm) must  
be maintained between the user’s body and the  
handset, including the antenna. Third-party belt-clips,  
holsters, and similar accessories used by this device  
should not contain any metallic components. Body-  
worn accessories that do not meet these requirements  
may not comply with RF exposure requirements and  
should be avoided.  
Telecommunications & Internet Association (CTIA)  
website at phonefacts.net.  
287  
Use only the supplied or an approved antenna.  
Should not carry the phone in a breast pocket.  
Unauthorized antennas, modifications, or attachments  
could impair call quality, damage the phone, or result  
in violation of regulations. Do not use the phone with a  
damaged antenna. If a damaged antenna comes into  
contact with the skin, a minor burn may result. Please  
contact your local dealer for replacement antenna.  
Should use the ear opposite the pacemaker to  
minimize the potential for interference. If you have  
any reason to suspect that interference is taking  
place, turn the phone OFF immediately.  
Hearing Aids  
Some digital wireless phones may interfere with some  
hearing aids. In the event of such interference, you may  
want to consult your service provider, or call the  
customer service line to discuss alternatives.  
Telecommunications & Internet  
Association (TIA) Safety Information  
Pacemakers  
Other Medical Devices  
The Health Industry Manufacturers Association  
recommends that a minimum separation of six inches  
be maintained between a handheld wireless phone  
and a pacemaker to avoid potential interference with  
the pacemaker. These recommendations are  
consistent with the independent research by and  
recommendations of Wireless Technology Research.  
Persons with pacemakers:  
If you use any other personal medical device, consult  
the manufacturer of your device to determine if they are  
adequately shielded from external RF energy. Your  
physician may be able to assist you in obtaining this  
information.  
Turn the phone OFF in health care facilities when any  
regulations posted in these areas instruct you to do so.  
Hospitals or health care facilities may be using  
equipment that could be sensitive to external RF  
energy.  
Should ALWAYS keep the phone more than six  
inches from their pacemaker when the phone is  
turned ON.  
288  
 
The WEEE logo (shown at the left) on the  
product or on its box indicates that this  
product must not be disposed of or  
dumped with your other household  
waste. You are liable to dispose of all your  
electronic or electrical waste equipment  
by relocating over to the specified  
WEEE Notice  
The Directive on Waste Electrical and Electronic  
Equipment (WEEE), which entered into force as  
European law on 13th February 2003, resulted in a  
major change in the treatment of electrical equipment  
at end-of-life.  
collection point for recycling of such  
hazardous waste. Isolated collection and  
proper recovery of your electronic and  
electrical waste equipment at the time of  
disposal will allow us to help conserving  
natural resources. Moreover, proper  
recycling of the electronic and electrical  
waste equipment will ensure safety of  
human health and environment. For more  
information about electronic and  
The purpose of this Directive is, as a first priority, the  
prevention of WEEE, and in addition, to promote the  
reuse, recycling and other forms of recovery of such  
wastes so as to reduce disposal.  
electrical waste equipment disposal,  
recovery, and collection points, please  
contact your local city center, household  
waste disposal service, shop from where  
you purchased the equipment, or  
manufacturer of the equipment.  
289  
 
RoHS Compliance  
User Guide Proprietary Notices  
This product is in compliance with Directive 2002/95/  
EC of the European Parliament and of the Council of  
27 January 2003, on the restriction of the use of certain  
hazardous substances in electrical and electronic  
equipment (RoHS) and its amendments.  
©2011 Sprint. Sprint and the logo are trademarks of  
Sprint.  
HTC, the HTC logo, HTC EVO, HTC Footprints,   
HTC Innovation, HTC Sense, and HTC Sync are  
trademarks or service marks of HTC Corporation.  
Google, the Google logo, Android, the Android logo,  
Android Market, the Android Market logo, Google Apps,  
Google Calendar, Google Checkout, Google Earth,  
Google Latitude, Google Maps, Google Talk, Gmail,  
Picasa, and YouTube are trademarks of Google Inc.  
Owner’s Record  
The model number, MEIDs, regulatory number, and  
serial number are located on a nameplate inside the  
battery compartment.  
Microsoft, Windows, ActiveSync, Excel, Outlook,  
Record the serial number in the space provided below.  
This will be helpful if you need to contact us about your  
device in the future.  
PowerPoint, Windows Media, and Windows Vista are  
either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft  
Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.  
Model: PG86100  
The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered  
trademarks by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such  
marks by HTC Corporation is under license.  
Serial No.:  
290  
     
This device contains Adobe® Flash® Player and  
Adobe® Reader® Mobile software under license from  
Adobe Systems Incorporated. Copyright ©1995—2011  
Adobe Systems Incorporated. All rights reserved.  
Adobe and Reader are trademarks of Adobe Systems  
Incorporated.  
All other company, product, and service names  
mentioned herein are trademarks or service marks of  
their respective owners.  
Wi-fi® is a registered trademark of Wi-Fi Alliance.  
microSD is a trademark of SD-3C LLC.  
Facebook is a trademark of Facebook, Inc.  
Twitter is a trademark of Twitter, Inc., and is used under  
license.  
FLICKR is the trademark and/or registered trademark  
of Yahoo! Inc.  
DLNA, DLNA Certified, and the DLNA disc logo are  
trademarks or registered trademarks of Digital Living  
Network Alliance. All rights reserved. Unauthorized use  
is strictly prohibited.  
Kobo and the Kobo logo are trademarks of Kobo Inc.  
iTunes is a registered trademark of Apple Inc.,  
registered in the U.S. and other countries.  
291  
Your device has been designed to provide you with  
reliable, worry-free service. If for any reason you have a  
problem with your equipment, please refer to the  
manufacturer’s warranty in this section.  
4B. Manufacturer’s Warranty  
For information regarding the terms and conditions of  
service for your device, please visit sprint.com or call  
Sprint Customer Service at 1-888-211-4727.  
Note: In addition to the warranty provided by your device’s  
manufacturer, which is detailed on the following pages,  
Sprint offers a number of optional plans to cover your  
equipment for non-warranty claims. Sprint Total  
Equipment Protection provides the combined  
coverage of the Sprint Equipment Replacement  
Program and the Sprint Equipment Service and  
Repair Program, both of which are available  
separately. Each of these programs may be signed up  
for within 30 days of activating your device. For more  
details, please visit your nearest Sprint Store or call  
Sprint at 1-800-584-3666.  
292  
 
alteration, misuse, improper installation or repair  
or improper storage;  
Manufacturer’s Warranty  
(b) Product whose mechanical serial number or  
electronic serial number has been removed,  
altered or defaced;  
(c) Damage from exposure to moisture, humidity,  
excessive temperatures or extreme environmental  
conditions;  
(d) Damage resulting from connection to, or use of  
any accessory or other product not approved or  
authorized by the Company;  
(e) Defects in appearance, cosmetic, decorative or  
structural items such as framing and non-  
operative parts;  
12 Month Limited Warranty  
HTC Corporation (the Company) warrants to the  
original retail purchaser of this HTC handheld portable  
cellular telephone, that should this product or any part  
thereof during normal consumer usage and conditions,  
be proven defective in material or workmanship that  
results in product failure within the first twelve (12)  
month period from the date of purchase, such defect(s)  
will be repaired or replaced (with new or rebuilt parts)  
at the Company’s option, without charge for parts or  
labor directly related to the defect(s).  
(f) Product damaged from external causes such as  
fire, flooding, dirt, sand, weather conditions,  
battery leakage, blown fuse, theft or improper  
usage of any electrical source.  
The antenna, keypad, display, rechargeable battery and  
battery charger, if included, are similarly warranted for  
twelve (12) months from date of purchase.  
The Company disclaims liability for removal or  
reinstallation of the product, for geographic coverage,  
for inadequate signal reception by the antenna or for  
communications range or operation of the cellular  
system as a whole.  
This Warranty extends only to consumers who  
purchase the product in the United States or Canada  
and it is not transferable or assignable.  
This Warranty does not apply to:  
(a) Product subjected to abnormal use or conditions,  
accident, mishandling, neglect, unauthorized  
293  
   
Before sending your wireless device to HTC  
Please follow the steps at htc.com/us/support or return to  
the place of purchase for repair or replacement  
processing. In addition, for reference to an authorized  
Warranty station in your area, you may telephone in the  
United States +1(866) 449-8358.  
Corporation for repair or service, please note that any  
personal data or software stored on the device may be  
inadvertently erased or altered. Therefore, we strongly  
recommend you make a back up copy of all data and  
software contained on your device before submitting it  
for repair or service. This includes all contact lists,  
downloads (i.e., third-party software applications,   
ring tones, games and graphics) and any other data  
added to your device.  
THE EXTENT OF THE COMPANY’S LIABILITY UNDER  
THIS WARRANTY IS LIMITED TO THE REPAIR OR  
REPLACEMENT PROVIDED ABOVE AND, IN NO  
EVENT, SHALL THE COMPANY’S LAIBILITY EXCEED  
THE PURCHASE PRICE PAID BY PURCHASER FOR  
THE PRODUCT.  
In addition, if your wireless device utilizes a Multimedia  
card, please remove the card before submitting the  
device and store for later use when your device is  
returned, HTC Corporation is not responsible for and  
does not guarantee restoration of any third-party  
software, personal information or memory data  
contained in, stored on, or integrated with any wireless  
device, whether under warranty or not, returned to HTC  
Corporation for repair or service.  
ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING ANY  
IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR  
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, SHALL BE  
LIMITED TO THE DURATION OF THIS WRITTEN  
WARRANTY. ANY ACTION FOR BREACH OF ANY  
WARRANTY MUST BE BROUGHT WITHIN A PERIOD  
OF 18 MONTHS FROM DATE OF ORIGINAL  
PURCHASE. IN NO CASE SHALL THE COMPANY BE  
LIABLE FOR AN SPECIAL CONSEQUENTIAL OR  
INCIDENTAL DAMAGES FOR BREACH OF THIS OR  
ANY OTHER WARRANTY, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,  
WHATSOEVER. THE COMPANY SHALL NOT BE  
LIABLE FOR THE DELAY IN RENDERING SERVICE  
UNDER THIS WARRANTY OR LOSS OF USE DURING  
To obtain repairs or replacement within the terms of  
this Warranty, the product should be delivered with  
proof of Warranty coverage (e.g., dated bill of sale), the  
consumer’s return address, daytime phone number or  
fax number and complete description of the problem,  
transportation prepaid.  
294  
THE TIME THE PRODUCT IS BEING REPAIRED OR  
REPLACED.  
Weather Disclaimer  
No person or representative is authorized to assume  
for the Company any liability other than expressed  
herein in connection with the sale of this product.  
ANY WEATHER, STOCK, OR OTHER INFORMATION,  
DATA, OR DOCUMENTATION (“ACCESSED  
INFORMATION”) ARE PROVIDED “AS IS” AND  
WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY OR ANY TECHNICAL  
SUPPORT. TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY  
APPLICABLE LAW, HTC AND ITS AFFILIATES expressly  
disclaim any and all representations and warranties,  
arising by law or otherwise, related to the Accessed  
Information, including without limitation any express or  
implied representation or warranty of merchantability,  
fitness for a particular purpose, non-infringement,  
quality, accuracy, completeness, effectiveness,  
reliability, or usefulness. Without limiting the foregoing, it  
is further understood that HTC and its Affiliates are not  
responsible for any use or of the Accessed Information  
or the results arising from such use, and that you use  
such information at your own risk.  
Some states or provinces do not allow limitations on  
how long an implied warranty lasts or the exclusion or  
limitation of incidental or consequential damage so the  
above limitation or exclusions may not apply to you.   
This Warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you  
may also have other rights, which vary from state to  
state.  
IN USA AND CANADA: Please go to htc.com/us/support  
Privacy Restrictions  
Some countries require full disclosure of recorded  
telephone conversations, and stipulate that you must  
inform the person with whom you are speaking that the  
conversation is being recorded. Always obey the  
relevant laws and regulations of your country when  
using the recording feature of your device.  
Warranty Disclaimer  
Your warranty is invalidated if you open or tamper with  
the device’s outer casing.  
295  
     
Limitation of Damages  
TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY  
APPLICABLE LAW, IN NO EVENT SHALL HTC OR ITS  
AFFILIATES BE LIABLE TO YOU, ANY USER, OR THIRD  
PARTY FOR ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL,  
CONSEQUENTIAL, INCIDENTAL OR PUNITIVE  
DAMAGES OF ANY KIND, ARISING IN CONTRACT,  
TORT, OR OTHERWISE, INCLUDING, BUT NOT  
LIMITED TO, INJURY, LOSS OF REVENUE, LOSS OF  
GOODWILL, LOSS OF BUSINESS OPPORTUNITY,  
LOSS OF DATA, AND/OR LOSS OF PROFITS,  
REGARDLESS OF THE FORESEEABILITY THEREOF  
OR WHETHER HTC OR ITS AFFILIATES HAVE BEEN  
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.  
AND IN NO EVENT SHALL THE TOTAL LIABILITY OF  
HTC OR ITS AFFILIATES EXCEED THE AMOUNT  
RECEIVED FROM YOU, REGARDLESS OF THE LEGAL  
THEORY UNDER WHICH THE CAUSE OF ACTION IS  
BROUGHT. THE FOREGOING DOES NOT AFFECT  
ANY STATUTORY RIGHTS WHICH MAY NOT BE  
DISCLAIMED.  
296  
 
App  
Add to Home 38  
Automatic Speech   
C
Index  
Calculator 97  
Calendar 88  
Recognition (ASR) 121  
Creating an Event 89  
Numerics  
1xRTT 183  
3-Way Call 174  
B
Erasing Events 94  
Event Alert Menu 91  
Meeting Request 90  
Sending Invites 90  
Showing or Hiding Events 95  
Synchronizing Google  
Calendars 95  
Backing Up 74  
Battery 1820  
Capacity 18  
Charging 20  
Installing 2, 19  
Safety 280  
Data Transfer Rates 181  
Call Forwarding 174  
Call Waiting 173  
Caller ID 173  
Camcorder 130  
Camera 130  
Bluetooth 150  
A
Car Kit 151  
Headset 151  
Browser 186  
Activation 3  
Adobe Reader 109  
Airplane Mode 49  
Alarm Clock 101  
Amazon MP3 232  
Android Market 212215  
Answering Calls 24  
Browser Menu 186  
Finding Text 195  
Screen Orientation 188  
Selecting Links 189  
Viewing Bookmarks 193  
Zooming In or Out 188  
3D Photos and Videos 132  
Camera Flash 134  
Flash FAQ 134  
Launching 130  
Review Screen 135  
Settings 136  
Index  
297  
   
Taking Pictures 133  
Videos 135  
Viewfinder Screen 131  
Zooming 132  
Application Settings 56  
Data Synchronization  
Settings 53  
Date & Time Settings 57  
Location Settings 46  
Messaging Settings 4748  
Personalization Settings 40  
Security Settings 5051  
Sound Settings 4142  
TTY Use 49  
Deleting Accounts 206  
Deleting Messages 200  
Exchange ActiveSync 197  
Managing Email   
Messages 200  
Printing 203  
Car Kit 151  
Car Panel 107  
Exiting 107  
Making a Call 107  
Clock 98  
Refreshing the Inbox 199  
Sorting Messages 200  
Emergency Numbers 26  
End-of-Call Options 27  
Enhanced 911 (E911) 26  
Entering Text 29  
Onscreen Keyboard 29  
Event Alert Menu 91  
Exchange ActiveSync  
Features 204  
D
Device Updates 120  
Display  
Data Services 182227  
Brightness 45  
Screen Timeout 44  
Settings 44  
Enabling and Disabling 53  
FAQs 226  
Launching the Web 183  
Password 5  
Security Features 53  
User Name 182  
Display Screen 13, 45  
Dock Mode 108  
E
Flagging Messages 204  
Meeting Request 205  
Out of the Office Reply 204  
Synchronization 54, 204  
Desk Clock 99  
eBooks 103  
Email  
Device (illus.) 8  
Device Settings  
Airplane Mode 49  
Account Settings 205  
Composing and   
Sending 201  
298  
Index  
F
Getting Around Your Device 21  
Gmail 207209  
Google Latitude 258  
Google Maps 252  
Using 118  
Facebook  
Facebook for HTC Sense 79  
I
Logging In 55  
Importing Entries 74  
In-Call Options 27  
Installing HTC Sync 111  
Internet  
Synchronizing 55  
Flash 134  
FAQ 134  
Flashlight 102  
Google Talk 209212  
GPS Navigation 251  
GPS Services 250  
H
Flickr  
History 60  
Logging In 55  
FM Radio 242  
Adding Station Names 243  
Minimizing or   
Turning Off 244  
Folder  
Add to Home 38  
Footprints 261  
Friend Stream 84  
Erasing 62  
Making a Call 61  
Prepending a Number 62  
Home Screen 35  
K
L
Key Functions 9  
Location Mode 250  
Location Services  
Turning On 250  
Location Settings 46  
Lock Screen 12  
Lock screen  
Extended 36  
HTC Sync 110117  
HTCSense.com 118  
Deleting Your Account 120  
Locating Your Device 119  
G
Gallery  
Unlocking 12  
Viewing Pictures and   
Videos 138  
Index  
299  
M
Multimedia Messaging   
(MMS) 162  
Music 234  
People 28, 63  
Adding a Number 71  
Mail 197206  
Mail Widget 206  
Sorting Email Messages 200  
Making Calls 23  
From an Email Message 24  
From Text Message 24  
Speed Dial Number 24  
Media Share 241  
Messaging  
Adding an Entry 67  
Assigning a Picture 72  
Assigning Ringers 71  
Contact Details Screen 68  
Editing an Entry 71  
Finding Entries 74  
Friend Stream 84  
Importing Entries 74  
My Profile 66  
MP3 Store 232  
Playing Music 234  
N
NASCAR   
Sprint Cup Mobile 246249  
Navigation, GPS 251  
News 220  
News Feeds 220222  
Notification Icons 1315  
Notifications Panel 16  
Saving a Phone Number 67  
Social Networks 79  
Working with Groups 75  
People Widget 78  
Using 78  
Personalize 40  
Phone Number  
Deleting Old Messages 48  
Multimedia Messaging  
(MMS) 162  
O
P
Notification 47  
Onscreen Keyboard 29  
Compact 30  
Preset Messages 48  
Text Messaging 162  
Voicemail 160  
Entering Text 30  
Phone 30  
Standard 30  
Displaying 23  
Finding 28  
Saving 27, 67  
microSD Card 125129  
Using as a USB Drive 128  
Missed Calls 26  
PDF files, reading 109  
Peep 8184  
Phone Ring Tone 41  
Phone Settings 40  
Movies 228  
300  
Index  
Photos  
Using 138  
Printing  
Email 203  
Photos 144  
Roaming 175  
Roam Mode 176  
Viewing Pictures and   
Roaming Guard 176  
Videos 138  
Q
R
Roaming Guards 176  
Picture Messaging  
Pictures and Videos 130  
Playlists  
Qik 149  
S
Closing 149  
Closing the application 149  
Sharing Live Videos 149  
Saving a Phone Number 27, 67  
Scenes  
Deleting 40  
Renaming 40  
Creating 236  
Polaris Office  
Radio  
Screen Lock 50  
Editing a Document 109  
Viewing Documents 108  
POP3/IMAP Email  
Adding 197  
Power Saver 57  
Enabling 57  
Power Saving 57  
Listening 242  
Sprint Radio 233  
Recalibrating the Screen 46  
Resetting Your Device 52  
Ringers  
Disabling 51  
Screen Orientation 45  
Secure Credential Storage 185  
Security  
Data Services 53  
Disabling Screen Lock 51  
Screen Lock 50  
Screen Unlock Password 51  
Screen Unlock Pattern 50  
Screen Unlock PIN 51  
Assigning to contacts 71  
Setting for Voice Calls 41  
Silence All 43  
Types 41  
Vibrate 43  
Display 58  
Email Synchronization 59  
Wireless Functions 58  
Power-Saving Tips 57  
Preset Messages 48, 163  
Index  
301  
Settings 40  
Applications 56  
Sound Set 41  
Applying 42  
Creating 42  
Speed Dial  
Sprint 4G  
Connecting 181  
Turning On 181  
Sprint Hotspot 222225  
Connecting To 223  
Setting Up 223  
Stocks 215  
Adding the Widget 217  
Lock Screen Style 217  
Swype 34  
Adjust Settings 34  
System Software  
Update 52  
Camera 136137  
Data Synchronization 53  
Date & time 57  
Display Settings 44  
Social Network 55  
Volume 42  
T
Shortcut  
Add to Home 38  
Silence All 43  
Sleep Mode 11  
SMS Text Messaging 162  
Social Networks 79  
Software Updates  
Sound  
TeleNav GPS Navigation 251  
Text Messaging 162  
Preset Messages 163  
Three-Way Calling 174  
Touch Tones 44  
TTY Use 49  
Turning Your Device On and  
Off 11  
Settings 224  
Sprint Radio 233  
Sprint Service  
Account Passwords 4  
Activation 3  
Sprint 411 6  
Alert Notification 44  
Notifications 41  
Touch Tones 44  
FAQs 230  
Twitter  
Sprint TV 228  
Sprint TV & Movies 228  
Logging In 55  
Synchronizing 55  
302  
Index  
U
V
W
Updating Your Device 120  
Wallpaper 45  
Changing 45  
Warranty 293  
Vibrate 43  
Weather 218220  
Web 182227  
Launching 183  
Mail 197  
User Name 182  
Widget 38  
Add to Home 38  
Wi-Fi 178180  
Working with Groups 75  
World Clock 100  
Videos  
Recording 135  
Viewing Map Layers 255  
Voice Dialing 122  
Voice Input 124  
Voice Memos 123  
Voicemail 160  
Clear Icon 161  
Notification 161  
Retrieving 161  
Setting Up 4, 160  
Volume 42  
Y
Z
YouTube 244  
Zooming 132  
VPN 184  
Preparing Your Device 184  
Index  
303  

Toshiba HDD2E64 User Manual
Teac GF 450K7 User Manual
Sony MHC FR10 User Manual
Seagate MOMENTUS ST9640322AS User Manual
Samsung SGH C120S User Manual
Samsung SCH R880MBAUSC User Manual
Polycom RMX 2000 User Manual (1)
Polycom Cell Phone 6020 User Manual
Philips LCD MONITOR 220E User Manual
Philips CTM600BLU User Manual